Dodge 2012 Ram Owners Manual Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner's

Dodge-2012-Dodge-1500-Owners-Manual-814523 dodge-2012-dodge-1500-owners-manual-814523

2015-09-07

: Dodge Dodge-2012-Ram-Owners-Manual-762140 dodge-2012-ram-owners-manual-762140 dodge pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 730

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2012 RAM TRUCK Gas 1500/2500/3500

Chrysler Group LLC
12D241-126-AA

875256 Ram Truck Gas OM cover.indd 1

First Edition

2012
O W N E R ’ S MA N UA L

Ram Truck Gas

1500/2500/3500

Printed in U.S.A.

3/16/11 4:33 PM

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features
and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered
on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Van Conversions/Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number

.............. 6

䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body support. For service issues, contact your authorized
modifications or special equipment installed by van dealer.
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
the windshield. This number also appears on the bottom
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacof the frame rail, on the right hand side, near the center
turer.
of the vehicle and underbody as well as the Automobile
Operating instructions for the special equipment in- Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.

Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 19

▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 21
▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 49

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 50

䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26

▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 51

䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

▫ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 34

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 53
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 55

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . .
▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 62
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

. . . . . . . . . . . 85
. . . . . . . . . . . 85
. . . . . . . . . . . 86
Inside The
. . . . . . . . . . . 87

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may use a keyless ignition system. This
system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch with either side up.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
with either side up.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4

— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFF
then pull the key out with your other hand.
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minEmergency Key Removal
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.

CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.

WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
• The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.

• If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) the EVIC will display “Key In Ignition”.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatDuring normal operation, after turning on the ignition
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
problems and loss of security protection.
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after Replacement Keys
two seconds.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.

• If a programmed Key Fob is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the
system’s memory. This will prevent the lost Key Fobs
from starting your vehicle. The remaining Keys Fobs
must then be reprogrammed.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE:
• This device must accept any interference that may be
• When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System
received, including interference that may cause undeserviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authosired operation.
rized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible signals, for the first three minutes the
horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes
only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.

To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about
16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After
the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.

To Disarm The System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
Rearming Of The System
has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
additional minutes of headlights turning on and Vehicle doors and the exterior lights will blink three times. Check
Security Light flashing, if the system has not been the vehicle for tampering.
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a programmed Sentry Key威 is inserted into the ignition
switch. To exit the alarming mode, press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button, or insert a programmed Sentry
Key威 into the ignition switch.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courSecurity System Manual Override
tesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
doors using the manual door lock plunger.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Key Fob with RKE
transmitter. The transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.

Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter

Remote Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door (If EVIC is
setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all
doors), or press the unlock button twice within five

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated button while still holding the LOCK button.
entry system will also turn on.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
removed.
current setting, proceed as follows:
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elecits previous setting.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Under- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the
information.
Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
following procedure:
the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
following procedure:
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.

To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
following procedure:
Using The Panic Alarm
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans- To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
mitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than ten hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still hold- least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
ing the LOCK button.
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
turn on.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Transmitter Battery Replacement
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph battery.
(8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
housing or the printed circuit board.
and horn will remain on.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
during removal.
by the system.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
Programming Additional Transmitters
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
contact your authorized dealer for details.
rubbing alcohol.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device must accept any interference received,
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
including interference that may cause undesired
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveoperation.
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apapproximately
300 ft (91 m).
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle theft alarm not active

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.

To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
Press and release the REMOTE START button
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secthe ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the
third cycle.
vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will automatically lock the doors.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

message “Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• “Remote Start Active — Key To Run” will display in
Start request.
the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON/
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
Center (EVIC)” for further information.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
(if equipped). Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position remote start is activated. These features will stay on
in order to drive the vehicle.
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/ The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Key Fob into the ignition switch. Once inserted, the Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch Location
1 - Unlock

2 - Lock

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.

vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all
doors closed).
Auto Unlock Doors Programming — If Equipped
The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
(System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
Panel” for further information.
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accorauthorized dealer per written request of the customer. dance with local laws.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Child-Protection Door Lock
Auto Unlock Doors — If Equipped
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

Child Lock Control

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
Power Windows — If Equipped
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.

Power Window Switches
1 – Left Front
2 – Right Front

3 – Right Rear
4 – Left Rear

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威 and
Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned
OFF or until a front door is opened.

WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

Auto-Down
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
first detent, release, and the window will go down
either front door is opened.
automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To open the window part way, press to the first detent conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the
and release it when you want the window to stop.
switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
window manually.
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
WARNING!
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
window before closing.
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Auto-Up Reset
the first detent and release when you want the window to It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
stop.
Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road additional two seconds after the window is closed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window LOCKOUT Switch — 4–Door Models
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window control on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors, press the window LOCK button
into the latched or down position. To enable the window
controls, press the window LOCK button again and
return the switch to the released or up position.

Window Lockout Switch
1 – Window Lockout Switch

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or in partially open positions. This is a

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front
equipped
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• All seat belt systems (except driver’s and second row
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
center position) include Automatic Locking Retractors
all passengers
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position
by extending the belt all the way out and then adjust• Front seat belts may incorporate pretensioners that
ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat
may enhance occupant protection by managing occuor secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
pant energy during an impact event
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen- Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
ger
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains possible.
(SABIC) — if equipped

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).

WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
collision.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
buckled up in a rear seat.
their arm.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)

5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.

You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

WARNING!

2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威
and Crew Cab front center seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is
designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.

Latch Plate To Buckle

Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.

• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in a
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Removing Slack From Belt

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
1. The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
allow the belt to retract fully.
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
WARNING!
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the seat belt
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle. The
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. belt tongue is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do to take up the extra webbing, and the buckles will hang
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they the area behind the front seats.
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the air bag deployed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible “click”. For proper seat belt usage, refer
“Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions”.

Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.

Inserting Latch Plate

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

In Use Position

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Squeeze the anchorage button located on the upper belt guide to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that fits you best.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab威, Mega
Cab威 and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To
fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the
latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end
of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips.
Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as
tightly as is comfortable.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.

First Row
Second Row
Third Row

Driver
N/A
ALR
N/A

Center
N/A
Cinch
N/A

Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
For Regular Cab Only

Driver
Center
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
First Row
N/A
ALR
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
Second Row
N/A
N/A
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For • N/A — Not Applicable
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.

Passenger
ALR
N/A

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING!

• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)” feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.

Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.

Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occudesigned to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
pants, including those in child restraints.
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Reduration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenAfter the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger notification.
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
fastened.
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized Seat Belt Extender
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended, and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
tivating BeltAlert威.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exBeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
tender and store it.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
the best way to keep the baby safe.
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the recommended seating positions. Remove and store
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the extender when not needed.
the force if there is a collision.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Knee Bolster

NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. If the
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
Side Air Bags they are located in the outboard side of the
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
front seats.
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
NOTE:
seat position.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
but they will open during air bag deployment.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Air Bag System Components
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the system components:
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are • Air Bag Warning Light
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped).

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
equipped
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
used for more severe collisions.
(SABIC) — if equipped
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
— If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideSupplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward,
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.

WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.

Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
(Continued) driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, rollover, or
side collisions.

The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collirequired for this vehicle.
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air severe initial deceleration.
bags — if equipped, SAB air bags — if equipped, and
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
front seat belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required,
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
depending on the severity and type of impact.
type of collision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosair bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates

are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
until the ignition key is turned off.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
removed.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.

Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the Older Children And Child Restraints
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardAnchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
WARNING!
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
infants in this position.
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat
may be struck by a deploying a passenger air bag
which may cause severe or fatal injury to the
infant.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt restraint:
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
as possible.
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
weight and height limits.
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
not work when you need it.
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH
child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the
Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威 and Crew Cab rear seat outboard
positions. LATCH equipped seating positions feature
both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the seat
cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind the
seat back (refer to “Child Restraint Tether Anchor”).

Quad Cab威/Mega Cab威/Crew Cab
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

Child restraint systems having attachments designed to NOTE:
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child • When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
older products.
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorthe child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
ages will continue to have features for installation in
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
of all of the available attachments provided with your
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
child restraint in any vehicle.
the vehicle.
• If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing The Child Restraint System

WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH mechanisms in the center position of a Quad
Cab威 rear seat, or Crew Cab model with a bench rear
seat. A child may be placed in the rear center seating
position of a Quad Cab威, or Crew Cab bench model
using the seat belt and child tether anchorage. The
LATCH anchorages in the rear seat are designed for
the two outboard seating positions for Quad Cab威,
Crew Cab威 with a full bench rear seat, and all three
positions for Mega Cab威, Quad Cab威 and Crew Cab威
with a split bench rear seat. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on
the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more
easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle
Seat Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.

The chart below defines the seating positions with an
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch
plate.

First Row
Second Row
Third Row

Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
ALR

Center
CRS Lock
N/A
Cinch
N/A

Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
For Regular Cab Only
First Row
Second Row

Driver
N/A
N/A

Center
ALR
N/A

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

Passenger
ALR
N/A

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:

retractor to route it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
hear a “click.”
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch 2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next, portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt pull it tight if necessary.
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
• Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
preferably between the head restraint posts underwill loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
neath the head restraint.
pull it tight if necessary.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate, nection to tether anchors have been available for some
first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages, one Tether Anchorage Points At The Right And Center
each behind the front center and right seats. Quad Cab威, Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
Mega Cab威 and Crew Cab models have three anchor1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
ages, one behind each of the rear seats.
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
WARNING!
seat.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
the square opening in the sheet metal.
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instructions below. See your authorized dealer for help if
necessary.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. (Quad Cab威/Crew Cab/Mega Cab威 - Rear Seats)
Mega Cab威
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.
2. Lift the cover, and attach the hook to the square
opening in the sheet metal.

Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

behind each seating position. You can gain access to the
center seating position tether strap loop by raising the
head restraint and reaching between the rear glass and
rear seat.

Mega Cab威 Tether Strap Mounting

3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Quad Cab威/Crew Cab
1. The tether straps loops are located between the rear
glass and the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located

Head Restraint Adjustment

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint, through the outboard tether strap loop, then
route it to the tether strap loop located directly behind
the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the anchor loop.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint through the center seat tether strap loop and
anchor to the tether strap loop located behind either
outboard seating positions.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab威/Crew Cab
1
2
3
4
5
6

— Anchor Loops
— Snap Hook
— Tether Strap
— Passenger’s Side Rear Child Seat
— Rear Center Child Seat
— Driver’s Side Rear Child Seat

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). considered a normal part of the break-in and not interAfter the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or preted as an indication of difficulty.
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
SAFETY TIPS
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
mental and should be avoided.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . 102

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 98
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . 104
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 121

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . 147
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . 148
▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . 149
▫ Mega Cab威 Rear Seat Features . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 156

䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 139

▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . 141

▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

䡵 Lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 163

▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

. . . . . . 172

䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . 173
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 177

䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 189

▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 䡵 Overhead Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . 182
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 184

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 195

▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 184

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 196

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Open Sunroof — Express Mode . . . . . . . . . . 201
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 201
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 201
(40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 207
. 208
. 209
. 209
. 210

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab威 . . . . . . . . . . 210

▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab . . . . . . . . . . . 211

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

▫ Glove Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

▫ Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

▫ Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

▫ Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

䡵 Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 221

▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

䡵 Rambox威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

▫ Storage (Regular Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫ Rambox威 Integrated Box Side Storage Bins . . 224

▫ Storage And Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫ Rambox威 Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

䡵 Easy-Off Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

▫ Removing The Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

▫ Disconnecting The Rear Camera — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

▫ Locking Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window. The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position (lever
flipped toward the rear of vehicle).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex right side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.

Folding Mirror

CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.

Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch

Power Mirror Controls

To adjust a mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right)
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
tons and a four-way mirror control switch.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
move.
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Power Mirror Movement

Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.

Slide-On-Rod Extender

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).

NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror
and can be adjusted separately.

Blindspot Mirror
Trailer Towing Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect

• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be Voice Command Button
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
Actual button location may vary with the raEnglish, Spanish, or French languages.
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.

The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.

example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an- Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
other prompt.
Help Command
• For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For

To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Cancel Command
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
and follow the audible prompts.
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identifew instances the system will take you back to the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
previous menu.
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
after the initial pairing process.
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referphone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
given a unique phone name.
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
pairing instructions:
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
• Press the
button to begin.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
“Device Pairing”.
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).

Call By Saying A Name
• Press the

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.

Dial By Saying A Number

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
“Dial”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
want to call.
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
• Press the

button to begin.

• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.

• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
may appear in the display of certain radios.
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
• Press the
button to begin.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
“Phonebook New Entry”.
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatimended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
instead of “Bob”.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Transfer From Mobile Phone
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
book entry, if desired.
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
phonebook entry that you are adding.
website for supported phones.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone“Call by Saying a Name” section.
book.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transstart the vehicle.
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE:
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- • Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
when the vehicle is not in motion.
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availdeleted or edited.
able for use.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
Entry” feature.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the •
phonebook entry that you are editing.
•
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
•
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a

Press the

button to begin.

After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

from the list, press the
button while the • The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
“Delete”.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
is deleted.
wish to delete.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
deleted or edited.
language is deleted.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
button to begin.
deleted or edited.
• Press the
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• Press the

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• To call one of the names in the list, press the
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
button during the playing of the desired name, and Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
say “Call”.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysNOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
operations at this point.
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the call, press and hold the
button until you hear a single
number designation you wish to call.
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
• The selected number will be dialed.

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.

Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
have.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
button until you hear a single beep, indicatpress the
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
Progress
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed Conference Call
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is hold), press and hold the
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling double beep indicating that the two calls have been
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer joined into one conference call.
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Three-Way Calling
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To described under “Making a Second Call While Current
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a single beep.
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
Redial
• Press the

button to begin.

Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

Uconnect™ Phone Features

Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:

Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• Press the
button to begin.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the language selection.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency numvoice commands will be in that language.
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phoneNOTE:
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
specific and is usable across all languages.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance
not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance:
area.
• Press the
button to begin.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Towing Assistance”.
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the mobile phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
WARNING!
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emerthe Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
gency, your mobile phone must be:
Towing Assistance references.
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• and have network coverage.
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
Voice Mail Calling
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
with Automated Systems”.
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
Working With Automated Systems
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
This method is used in instances where one generally has number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
navigating through an automated telephone system.
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging call and then press the
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
vices require immediate response selection. In some say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
tones over the phone.
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • Press the
button to begin.
network configurations. This is normal.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
use of this feature.
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you Phone And Network Status Indicators
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to notification to inform you of your phone and network
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of status when you are attempting to make a phone call
the voice prompt.
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”.
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
and say “Transfer Call”.
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
button and
phone being announced, press the
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two secelectronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
with one electronic device at a time.
paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 Select Another Mobile Phone
connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using another
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• Press the
button to begin.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• Press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the
button at any time while the
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”

Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
•
•
•

Voice Training
Press the
button to begin.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
training mode, follow one of the two following proceAt the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
You can also press the
button at any time while the radio mode):
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
wish to delete.
the session begins, or,
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• press the

button.

• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some.
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium blower setting,
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• low road noise,
entries are not similar.
• smooth road surface,

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.

SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.

Read Messages:
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness If you receive a new text message while your phone is
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
• Press the
button.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Recent Calls
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Downyou.
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, IncomAfter reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

3. Where are you?
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
4. I need more direction.
a new message:
5. L O L
• Press the
button.
6. Why
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
7. I love you
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 8. Call me
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
9. Call me later
button while the
To send a message, press the
10. Thanks
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
11. See You in 15 minutes
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to. 12. I am on my way
List of Preset Messages:

13. I’ll be late

1. Yes

14. Are you there yet?

2. No

15. Where are we meeting?

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the

button.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.

Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

pairing
phone book

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
options, press the Voice Command
set to low.
for the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand

Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
The Voice Command system understands two types of
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
Changing the Volume
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
a normal speaking volume.
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands:
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Main Menu
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
menu.
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
Radio FM
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:

Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

− “Continue” (to continue recording)

• “Switch to system setup”

− “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Change to setup”

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

• “Language English”

− “Next” (to play the next memo)

• “Language French”

− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

• “Language Spanish”

− “Delete” (to delete a memo)

• “Tutorial”

• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)

• “Voice Training”

Setup
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
button first and wait for the beep before
following:
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

power seat switches that are used to control the move- Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
ment of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.

Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
(Continued) Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
Lumbar Control Switch
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
the lumbar support.
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.

controls for each seat are located near the bottom center
of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGHlevel heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF.

NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.

Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
operate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from
LOW to OFF automatically, based on time and temperature of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGH
heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to
LOW heat. Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat
setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes
before automatically shutting OFF. The heated seats can
shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is
already warm.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one
for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGHlevel heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF.

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartNOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
two to five minutes.
in higher ambient temperatures.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch
operate.
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
below the climate controls. The fans operate at two
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
speeds, HIGH and LOW.
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
Press the switch once to choose HIGH,
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
press it a second time to choose LOW.
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
Pressing the switch a third time will
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
turn the ventilated seat OFF. When
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
HIGH speed is selected both lights on
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
the switch will be illuminated. When
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
LOW speed is selected one light will
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
be illuminated.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models equipped with remote start, the drivers
ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a
remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or backward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is used to adjust the seatback position
and is located on the outside of the seat cushion.

Recline Handle

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean
back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle. To return the seatback, lift
upward on the handle, lean forward and release the
handle at the desired position.

WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback
and actuate the handle, then position the seatback
in the desired position.

40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.
On some models the back of the center portion (20%)
Dump Feature — Manual Recline Seat Only
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This compartment.
“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind
the seat.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mega Cab姞 Rear Seat Features
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — If Equipped
Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold down either rear seatback:
1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.

Rear Seat Recliner Handle

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Table Mode Handle

2. Fold the seatback forward.

Table Mode

3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward
when the seatback is folded flat.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop or collision and strike
someone in the vehicle, causing serious injury or
death.

To fold either rear seat flat:
1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either
of the rear seats.

Handle

2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

WARNING!
An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury or death. Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback in not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.

Rear Passenger Fold Flat Seats

3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.

Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.

Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.

Adjustment Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

NOTE:
Rear Head Restraints
The two outboard seat are equipped with adjustable head • The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad
restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Vehicle” for further information.
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

Adjustment Button

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to
side of the drivers seat cushion.
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
pressed.
NOTE: The power lumbar option is not programmable
with driver memory seats.
Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters.
One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either
memory position. The memory system can accommodate
up to two RKE transmitters, each RKE transmitter linked
to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
recall the driver’s seat position, driver’s outside mirror for that button and store a new one.
position, adjustable brake, accelerator pedals position
Memory Seat Buttons

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to 7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
the ON/RUN position.
driver’s door.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
Step 3.

8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
sideview mirror to the desired positions.
the ON position.
4. Adjust the power adjustable pedals (if equipped) to
11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
the desired positions.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to MEMORY buttons on the drivers seat during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
Memory Position Recall
one second will occur before another recall can be
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory selected.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
remove the key.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the 2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
memory position 1.
before continuing to Step 3.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the 3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to on the driver’s door.
memory position 2.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 on the driver’s door.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. To disable another RKE
transmitter linked to either memory position, repeat
steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter.

greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.

NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. • The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
driving position when the key is placed into the
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
the ACC/ON position.
vehicle.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically disThere are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
available:
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is Exit/Entry.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled 1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

Hood Release

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release
it, before raising the hood.

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

Safety Latch (1500 Series Shown)

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.

Headlight Switch Location

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the
headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)
position.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.

Automatic Headlight Position

When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.

The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.

Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. parking light symbol. To turn off the parking lights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a Fog Lights — If Equipped
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when switch to the parking light or headlight position and
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is pushing in the headlight rotary control.
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Fog Light Switch

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.

Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far
right detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK
button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the
OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out.
This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows
the doors to stay open for extended periods of time
without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control right (brighter)
or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed Cargo Light
the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo
button.
required during the day.

Dimmer Control

Cargo Light Switch

The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately
30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is
pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled Multifunction Lever
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on steering column.
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show defective.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
Turn Signal Lever
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

High/Low Beam Switch

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
Windshield Wipers
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
the desired wiper speed.
operation.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is
depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate

for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It
will then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in the off
position, the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately
three times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
time and automatically shut off.

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Tilt Steering Lever

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.

The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material.. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
Adjustable Pedals Switch
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
WARNING!
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In- You could lose control and have an accident. Always
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
CAUTION!
(40 km/h).
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.

WARNING!
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL

2 — RES +
3 — SET -

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.

To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
To Deactivate
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set decrease until the button is released. Release the button
speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so EQUIPPED
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
Control.
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense姞 Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Prochanged to the ON/RUN position.
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerposition, the system will remain active until the vehicle
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inspeed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
strument Panel” for further information.
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
10 mph (16 km/h).
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
ParkSense姞 Sensors
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.

ParkSense威 Warning Display

Park Assist System On

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Park Assist System Off

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

Slow Tone

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

Fast Tone

Continuous Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Arcs
Radio Volume
Reduced

Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Park Assist
System ON
None
No

WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast

Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous

Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes

Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes

the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerEnabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your InParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with a switch
strument Panel” for further information.
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of

NOTE: ParkSense威 will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

When the ParkSense威 switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.

PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.

If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure
ParkSense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the igniswitch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
tion. If the message continues to appear, see an authoService The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
rized dealer.
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dammessage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
age the sensors.
• ParkSense威, when on, will reduce the volume of the
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
radio when it is sounding a tone.
NOTE:
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operatbe covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ing properly.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
bumper.
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.

• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located to the left of the tailgate handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.

When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zones
Red
Yellow
Green

Distance to the rear of
the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION! (Continued)

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting • Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key and pressing the
• Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
“save” soft-key.
• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
5. Press the “save” soft key.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio

1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is located on the headliner above
the review mirror. The overhead console contains the
following features:
• Courtesy/Reading Lights

Overhead Console

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing on
the corresponding lens.

Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the overhead Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
console designate the three different HomeLink威 chan- Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
nels.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.

HomeLink威 Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display “CLEARING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when the EVIC
displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
Training The Garage Door Opener
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 1 — Door Opener
open and close the door. The name and color of the 2 — Training Button
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to
program.

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 On some garage door openers/devices there may be a
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
ter button.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased seconds each time). The EVIC will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT”. If the garage door opener/device activates,
for the channel to train.
programming is complete.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
complete the training.
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. erase the channels.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, 8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to
program.
follow these steps:
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
ter button.
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
release the button.
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN3. Without releasing the button proceed with “ProgramNEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
NOTE:
steps.
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
for the channel to train.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
before 1995.
Step 2.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the
garage door opener/device activates, programming is
complete.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.

To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigrepeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
erase the channels.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until door or gate motor.
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
release the button.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remainprogram.
ing steps.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
button while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand- To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
held transmitter every two seconds.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
release the button.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
for the channel to train.
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from follow all remaining steps.
Step 2.
Using HomeLink姞
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button. To operate, press and release the programmed
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
device is plugged in and activates, programming is programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightcomplete.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
also be used at any time.
programming, plug it back in at this time.

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
HomeLink威 buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
“CLEARING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
the EVIC displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
remember to plug it back in?
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener
without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–
355–3515
or,
on
the
Internet
at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.

General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

Open Sunroof — Express Mode
Press the switch rearward and release it and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During “Express Open” operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts reTo open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
to full open.
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it and the sunroof Pinch Protect Override
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
“Express Close”. During “Express Close” operation, any seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
to move toward the closed position.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the pressed.
forward position.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.

Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Ignition Off Operation
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
The power sunroof switch remain active for up to apNOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is proximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
open.
feature.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the switch will remain active for approximately ten minutes
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol.

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all locations:
times.
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack —
without floor mounted shifter.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Inside the top storage tray — with floor mounted
shifter.

Power Outlet — Upper Lid
Power Outlet — Floor Shifter

• Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.

• Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Quad Cab威 or Crew Cab.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

Power Outlet — Rear Center Console

The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply
power when the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC positions.
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.

Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or
with Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or
with Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

For vehicles equipped with an optional floor shifter.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.

Optional Floor Shifter
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver

Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter (Bench Seat)
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

Power Inverter Outlet

The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

NOTE:
• When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will
be a delay of approximately one second before the
power inverter status indicator turns on. The status
indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether
the inverter is producing AC power.

CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
(40–20–40 Seats)
The cupholders are located in the pull-out tray at the
bottom of the center stack. The pull-out tray must be
secured when opened. To secure the tray push down
• Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter until it “clicks”.
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adapter.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Mounted Shifter
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats and a floor
mounted shifter there are two cupholders located in the
floor console.

Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab姞
Quad Cab威 vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger
convenience.

Rear Cup Wells
Cupholders (Floor Mounted Shifter)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab
STORAGE
Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage
The glove box is located on the passenger side of the
located in the center armrest.
instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.

Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder
Glove Box
1 — Upper Glove Box
2 — Lower Glove Box

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle To open the lower glove box, pull on the handle to release
release. The glove box door will automatically open.
the latch and lower the door.

Upper Glove Box

Lower Glove Box

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are
located in the door trim panels.

Rear Door Storage — Crew Cab
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger door trim panels.

Rear Door Storage
Front Door Storage

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.

WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored
should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further
information.

Center Storage Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

Upper Storage Compartment

With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin.

Lower Storage Bin

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second
row seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for
To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
cleaning.
the latch and open the lid.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
fully open the lid.
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.

Opened Storage Bin
Drivers Side Seatback Storage

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Storage (Regular Cab)
Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the length of the cab.
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.

Storage Bin

Crew Cab Storage

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

CAUTION!
Always lift the storage compartment lids by using
the handle. Failure to lift the lids by using the handle
can result in damage to the lids.

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
Grocery Bag Hooks

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located A locking device in the center of the window helps to
on the overhead console.
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Quad Cab威 and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat
may be equipped with a folding load floor.

WARNING!

Rear Window Switch

Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.

Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Unfolding the Load Floor
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

Unfolding The Load Floor

2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.

Load Floor In Open Position

3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.

3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.

WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.

Load Floor Securing Straps

4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

RAMBOX姞 — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox威 system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins

RamBox姞 Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly
distributed cargo.

• Cargo extender/divider
• Bed rail tie-down system

RamBox威 Cargo Storage Bins

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)
per bin.
To open a storage bin, press and release the button
located on the lid. The RamBox威 lid will open upward to
allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.

RamBox威 Pushbutton And Lock

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The interior of the RamBox威 will automatically illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch
located at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch
once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again
will turn the lights back on.

CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
is required to stay open for extended periods of time,
it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
The RamBox威 storage bins can be locked using the
vehicle key. To lock the storage bin, insert the key into the
keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock.

CAUTION!
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
(Continued)
RamBox威 Light Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox威 bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to
vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for
damage, secure all cargo to prevent movement and
protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp
objects with appropriate padding.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition to other RamBox威 accessories) are available from
MOPAR威.

RamBox姞 Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

RamBox威 Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
Lever — If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Bed Extender — If Equipped
The bed extender has three functional positions:
• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position

Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
To install the bed extender into the storage position,
perform the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.

Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully 3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard
forward in the bed against the front panel.
ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.

Storage Position

Cargo Tie Down Loop

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side 5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
gates in the closed position.
the panel into place and assist against theft.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.

Side Gates Closed

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To install the bed extender into a divider position perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.

Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle

2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides
of the bed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

Aligning Gate To Slots

Side Gates Closed

3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends 5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place
are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
and assist against theft.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
gates in the closed position.
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an
additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

additional cargo room is needed. The extender position 2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both center handle vertically in order to release the extender
side gates.
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and
handle.

Extender Position

To install the bed extender into the extender position
perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.

Extender Installation

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.

Locking Tab

WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
• When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Bed Rail Tie-Down System

CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat
should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed
that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats

Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.

Utility Rail End Cap
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS

Disconnecting the Rear Camera — If Equipped

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera connector
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in bracket located on the rear sill.
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Loading” document available from your authorized dealer.
For safety reasons, follow all instructions in this important document.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.

Connector Bracket

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera 2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pressthe electrical connector must be disconnected prior to ing inward in the locking tab.
removing the tailgate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove box)
to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals
do not corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate

Locking Tab

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera (if
equipped), refer to “Disconnecting the Rear Camera — If
Equipped” in this section.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the 2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove box) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the
bracket back into the sill.

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing 5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
support cables.
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.

WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
Locking Tang

Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key.
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
3. Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
䡵 Switch Bank Button Description . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Upper Switch Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Lower Switch Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 249
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 250

䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ EVIC Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode / Distance
To Empty (DTE) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Tire PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 297

▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 298

▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 289
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 289
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 308
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 308
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 313
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . 327
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Play A DVD Using The
Touch-Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Replacing The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

▫ Replacing The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Unwired威 Stereo Headphone Lifetime
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio
Controls — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones

▫ Window Fogging And Frosting . . . . . . . . . . 366

. . . . . . . 355

▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5
6

—
—
—
—
—
—

Headlight Switch
Instrument Cluster
Radio
Upper Switch Bank
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment

7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Cup Holders
11 — Climate Controls
12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter

13
14
15
16

—
—
—
—

Transfer Case Position Switch
Ignition Switch
Hood Release
Parking Brake Release

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SWITCH BANK BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Upper Switch Bank

2. ESC OFF
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.

3. HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The upper switch bank is located on the center of the
Refer to “What To Do In Emergencies” for more inforinstrument panel.
mation.
4. 115V POWER INVERTER
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
5. REAR PARK ASSIST
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
6. TPMS LIGHT LOAD — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.
Lower Switch Bank
The lower switch bank is located on the center of the
1. TOW/HAUL
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information. instrument panel.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

1. HEATED SEATS
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
2. VENTILATED SEATS
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
3. HEATED STEERING WHEEL
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a
rapid rate.

1. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM x 1000).
3. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
CAUTION!
ON/RUN position.
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high RPM for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.

4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

2. Turn Signal Indicators
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaThe arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
when the turn signal lever is operated.
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).
6. 4 LOW
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
wheels.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
required and you may experience reduced performance,
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
may require towing.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indiThis light informs you of a problem with the
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
light will come on when the ignition is first
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, 8. 4WD Indicator
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
to receive torque from the engine simultaneengine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
ously.
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

9. 4WD Auto Indicator
11. TOW/HAUL
The 4WD auto indicator will be illuminated
The TOW HAUL button is located on the
whenever the four-wheel drive mode is autocenter stack upper switch bank. This light will
matically engaged.
illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
10. SVC (Service) 4WD
12. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
The SVC 4WD light monitors the electric shift Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
four-wheel drive system. If the SVC 4WD light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
stays on or comes on during driving, it means
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
that the four-wheel drive system is not funcwhen the ignition switch is turned to the
tioning properly and that service is required.
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction InFor vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indidicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.

14. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. 15. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button/ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) Button — If Equipped
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
Press this button to toggle between the odometer display,
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
trip odometer display or the “ECO” display in the base
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cluster. Holding the button in resets the trip odometer
that caused the ESC activation.
reading when in trip mode.
13. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi(EVIC) the “ECO” message will be displayed in the EVIC
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
display in the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Electronic
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for
until the vehicle is disarmed.
further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

16. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display Area — If Equipped
Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require
that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has
been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or
serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If
s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is
accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the TRIP ODOMETER button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button for
approximately two seconds until the display resets.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator On
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Pressure Low
CHANgE OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
ESCOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Stability Control Off
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Cap Loose
HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Too Hot
LoCOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Engine Coolant

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours on the base cluster,
perform the following: Place the ignition in the ON/
RUN, but do not start the engine. With the odometer
value displayed, hold the TRIP button down for a period
of six seconds. The odometer will change to trip value
first, then it will display the engine hour value. The
engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds
until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started.
If equipped, some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for
further information.

modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
loose gascap indicator or the message “gASCAP” will
display in the odometer display area. Tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the TRIP button to turn off
the message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose gas cap indicator will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for the premium
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are cluster (Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles. time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
noFUSE
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomfollowing procedure:
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
(do not start the engine).
Vehicle”.
CHANgE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHANgE OIL message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Do In Emergencies” for further information.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indicator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi- Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate
18. Shift Lever Indicator
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperainstrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
ture gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously
automatic transmission.
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine
is allowed to cool.
NOTE: In vehicles with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, the highest
available transmission gear is displayed in the lower
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
(EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feashift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veture is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift lever to
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
“Starting And Operating” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

moves to either extreme left or right and remains there
19. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal during normal driving, the electrical system should be
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until serviced.
fuel is added.
NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi- various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information. cycling operation is controlled by the engine control
module. Post-heat operation can run for several minutes,
20. High Beam Indicator
and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
stabilize.
beam. Push the multifunction lever forward to
switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward 22. Cargo Light
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
light is activated by pressing the cargo light
21. Voltmeter
button on the headlight switch.
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within
the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

23. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

24. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
system is required.
on.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
tires.)
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
NOTE: The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a
“Low Tire” message in the odometer (Base Cluster), or in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) screen
indicating “Low Tire” for EVIC enabled clusters.

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
monitors the emissions and engine control system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned on and
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain on
until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come on
during starting, have the condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

27. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

28. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
30. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
lights are on.
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
29. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off-road operation). If this
may stay on for as long as four seconds.

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warnor faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Informalight goes off.
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further
CAUTION!
information.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.

31. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

32. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indicator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
33. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
• The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimi(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) feanating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
• The EVIC main menu will display Radio Off, AM/FM
instrument cluster.
and SAT radio stations, and AUX/HDD sources at the
top of the main menu above Fuel Economy.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• Compass and Outside Temperature
• Audio Information
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Information
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

• Warning Messages

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

• Customer Programmable Features (System Setup)
• Trip Information (in Odometer line)

Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and submenus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.

EVIC Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
Press and release the UP button to scroll the following messages:
upward through the main menus and sub• Left front turn signal lamp out
menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Right front turn signal lamp out

• Wrong Key

• Left rear turn signal lamp out

• Damaged Key

• Right rear turn signal lamp out

• Key not programmed

• Service air filter

• Key In Ignition

• Perform service

• Turn Signal On

• ESC System Off

• Park Assist System On

• Coolant Low

• Park Assist System Off

• Check Trailer Brake Wiring

• Oil Change Due > Dealer Info

• Service Trailer Brake System

• Warning Object Detected

• Trailer Brake Connected

• Service Park Assist System

• Lights On

• System Setup Unavailable — Vehicle Not in Park

• RKE Battery Low

• Remote start aborted — Door ajar

• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped

• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271

• Remote start aborted — Fuel low

• Blind spot detection unavailable

• Remote start active — Key to Run

• Automatic High Beams on

• Remote start disabled — System fault

• Automatic High Beams off

• System Setup Unavailable — Vehicle in Motion •
(manual transmission)
•
• Remote Start Disable — Start Vehicle to Reset
•
• Service Four Wheel Drive System
•
• Clean Park Assist sensors
•
• Front Park Assist Not available - Blinded
•
• Rear Park Assist Not available - Blinded
•
• Low Fuel
•
• Service blind spot system
•
• Blind spot system off
•

Clearing channels
Channels cleared
Channels defaulted
Channel X transmitting
Channel X training
Channel X trained
Did not train
Memory 1 Profile Set
Memory 2 Profile Set
Memory System Unavailable — Not in Park

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Memory 1 Profile Recall
• Memory 2 Profile Recall
• Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Veh in Reverse

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
EVIC Warning Lights
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
• Door Ajar
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
This light will turn on to indicate that one or driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
more doors may be ajar.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The rized dealer.
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
• Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Cruise Engaged

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
• Electronic Speed Control Light
This light will turn on when the electronic vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
speed control is ON.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the require towing.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
light will come on when the ignition is first
This light warns of an overheated engine conditurned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apcheck. If the light does not come on during starting, have
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for light goes off.
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
CAUTION!
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• SERV 4WD
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Indicator illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

• Transmission Temperature Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this

If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.

WARNING!

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275

• Loose Gascap Indicator
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
BACK button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap the following steps.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
Oil Change Due
start the engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
indicator system. The Oil Change Due message will
within 10 seconds.
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode / Distance To
Empty (DTE) — If Equipped
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “0”
or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history
information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
Fuel Saver Mode
ECO will display in the Compass / Outside Temperature
line of the EVIC. This message will appear whenever the
Fuel Saver Mode — On
Multi-Displacement System (MDS) (if equipped) allows
the engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving in a fuel efficient manner.
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277

Distance To Empty (DTE)
Distance To Empty (DTE) Shows the estimated distance
that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank.
This estimated distance is determined by a weighted
average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy,
according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be
reset through the RETURN button.

Trip Functions
Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
button until one of the following Trip Functions display
in the EVIC odometer line:
• Trip A
• Trip B

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle • Elapsed Time
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.
When the DTE value is less than 10 miles (16 km)
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informaestimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
tion:
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a • Trip A
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.

Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
• Elapsed Time
available information displays, then press SELECT to
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
display any one of the following choices.
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON • Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
or START position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press (for approximately two seconds) and
release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button once
to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset
all resettable functions, press and release the
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button a second time
within three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed
function. (Reset ALL will display during this threesecond window).

• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature — If Equipped
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake
status indicator.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279

NOTE:
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire • Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
PSI” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
This will display the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
(shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Presadditional information, refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor
sures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
System” in “Starting And Operating”.
information.
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.

Tire Pressure Display

Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE:
• The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be
driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect
the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature
readings are not updated when the vehicle is not
moving.
• During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with
outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed temperature is due to
blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient

temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), it is suggested that the interior
cabin temperature be manually controlled should the
system not perform as desired while in automatic
mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
removed.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281

NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
an environment free from large metallic objects such as calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, EVIC.
etc.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
Manual Compass Calibration
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator indicator turns off. The compass will now function
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the normally.
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
then press the SELECT button.
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is differences, and provide the most accurate compass
displayed in the EVIC then press and release the SELECT heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
button.

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.

Compass Variance Map

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaSetup displays in the EVIC. Press the SELECT button to tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
enter the System Setup Sub-Menu.
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
following choices.
deactivated.
Select Language
Park Assist System
When in this display you may select one of five lanThe Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
make your selection, scroll up or down until the preItalian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will disSELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
play in the selected language.
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
Nav–Turn By Turn
to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The
When this feature is selected, the navigation system Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operutilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive ating information.

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.

scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
pedals, and radio settings will return to the memory set
position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is
pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory
seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the
memory set position using the seat mounted switch. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285

seat features will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on
when remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the key is
turned to RUN. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.

Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers
When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.

Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the system
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287

Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
When this feature is selected it provides automatic driver
seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.

Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window Hill Start Assist (HSA)
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “Fuel Saver Mode” message is located in the
Compass/Temperature display; this message can be
turned on or off. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.

preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Refer to “Integrated Trailer Brake Module” in “Starting
And Operating.”
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.

Trailer Brake Type
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
be changed between “Light Electric” and “Heavy Elec- RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
tric”. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.

MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.

Media Center 130 (RES)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the SCROLL control knob.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291

RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
TIME Button
Play.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricplayer will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
tions.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295

Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96,
80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
32
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
40, 32, 24, 16, 8

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
Layer 3
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
VBR bit rate.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297

Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.

298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right ACC position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)

SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.

Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.

Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
screen.
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature TIME Button
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further and radio frequency.
details.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
screen.

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.

MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be sePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Music Type information.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
treble tones.
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
No program type or
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
None
undefined
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Classical
Classicl
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
College
College
the front and rear speakers.
Country
Country
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Foreign Language
Language
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk

16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk

Program Type
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
NOTE:
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SEEK Button
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
change of pace.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanPress this button to change the display from a large CD dom Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.

MPEG
Specification

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).

Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilNOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
limited coverage in Alaska.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
System Activation
down.
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.

Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
Number (ESN/SID).
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
ESN/SID Access
on or above the antenna.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

Reception Quality
SEEK Buttons
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause intermittent reception.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
button a second time.
cause signal blockage.
INFO Button
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa(Satellite) Mode
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
ACC position to operate the radio.
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the channel with the same selected Music Type name.
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
SETUP Button
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type following items:
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
seconds will allow the program format type to be senumber is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
lected.
Sirius subscription.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
type.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.

Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartbutton number will display.
ment.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.

USB Connector Port

NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
where the iPod威 or consumer electronic audio device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
located in the glove compartment.
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

not available in the glove compartment, route the cable Using This Feature
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
etc.) information on the radio display.
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
pressing radio switches, as described below.
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
audio device)
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.

Play Mode
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
holding the FF >> button.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
seconds.
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.

device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.

List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.

• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
each track in the current list and then forward to the
device or external USB device.
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockSCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previthe track detail on the radio display. Once the track
ous and next tracks.
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.

• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.

• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.

• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF EQUIPPED
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Getting Started
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
• Screen located in the overhead console : Unfold the
Next Track
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
Overhead Video Screen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, Or
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
Press the LOAD button then corresponding number (1–6)
Control knob.
where the DVD is to be loaded (Non-Touch-Screen).
• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate 3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™. switch is on Channel 1.
• The Remote Control

Using The Remote Control

• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)

1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.

Play A DVD
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by re1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
on the Remote Control.
Controls. If a channel list appears on the right side of the
screen, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear
VES Controls screen.

Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen

NOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting
when turned off.

Rear VES Soft-key

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the
MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at
the top left of the screen.
NOTE: The “1” and “2” soft-keys are displayed for the
headphone channels. Touch 1 or 2 based on which
channel you want to change, select the new mode from
the available list on the right. Modes that are unavailable
are greyed-out.

Select Channel/Screen 1 And
DISC In The MEDIA Column

NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is Play Video Games
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the input jacks located on the back of the center console.
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.

1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
3. Right Audio In – Red

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be Using The Remote Control
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
jacks:
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
on the Remote Control.
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.

Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.

3. Touch the 1 or 2 based on the headphone channel you
want to change. To exit press the back arrow soft-key at
the top of the screen.

2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.

Select Channel/Screen 1 And
AUX 1 In The VES Column
Rear VES Soft-key

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the
desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE
button on the remote until the desired audio source
appears on the screen.

Select FM Mode On The VES Screen

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls

Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD
In The MEDIA Column
Rear VES Soft-key

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

Important Notes For Single Video Screen System

Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio

• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
simultaneously.
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
and right side equates to Channel 2.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
playing the first track.
Channel 2 is for audio only. Selecting a video source
(DVD) will not show the video on the screen.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
is on Channel 1.
will display on the screen and the audio could be
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the Video Screen is closed

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.

NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.

2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly
on the right side of the screen.
pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.

Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

NOTE:
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key based on the channel you
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
want to change and then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
column. To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the
corner will turn off the remote control screen
screen.
functions.
Rear VES Soft-key

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button
is illuminated momentarily.

Remote Control

3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five
seconds.

Remote Control

Controls And Indicators

4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel
1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in
the Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).

5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear through the current audio track or video chapter. In
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
to turn the headphone transmitter on.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previstart of the current or previous audio track or video ous disc.
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD for the selected channel.
disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the Station
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
CD).
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
9. 䡲 (Stop) – Stops disc play
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode, for details on changing modes.
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
button to access the display settings (see the display
radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select the
disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG
menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in the
Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a
DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access Remote Control Storage
the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
manual.)
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents.
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player, follow the
radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock on. The radio
and the video screen(s) indicate when Video Lock is
active.
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
Replacing The Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
The Remote Control Storage

Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.

• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.

• To disable the Remote Control from making any • Replace the battery compartment cover.
changes, press the Video Lock button add follow the
radio’s instructions (select menu, rear ves, lock). If the

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

Controls
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
on the right ear cup.
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones

2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status on a
popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
Selection menu appears on screen.

1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector 4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
switch..
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate
to the available modes and press the ENTER button to
NOTE:
select the new mode.
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
BACK button on the remote control.

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Replacing The Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown.
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Unwired姞 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTthe initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEparticular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
able.
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

You may register your Unwired威 wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.

What Will Unwired威 Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威 reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
If you have any questions or comments regarding your radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
Unwired威 wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com. changed to a mode that is different from the VES™

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority Information Mode Display
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM). The VES™
has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, SCAN,
TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is
not in shared mode.
When in shared disc both the radio and the VES™ have
control of the video functions. The VES™ has the ability
to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).

Information Mode Video Screen Display

1. Channel 1 Mode

The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the 2. Channel 1 Shared Status
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes 3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
4. Channel 2 Mode

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

5. Channel 2 Shared Status

Numeric Keypad Menu

6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action
9. Clock

10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Numeric Keypad Menu

When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, Disc Menu
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station,

Disc Menu For CDs

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random
play.
Display Settings

When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, SIRIUS Backseat TV™, etc.),
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
button.

Video Screen Display Settings

Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
player.

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.

Disc Formats
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the following types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):

• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
notes about DVD Region Codes)
the next available audio mode without using the Mode
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
Select menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will • Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
display menu or media.
format files
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

DVD Region Codes

Recorded Discs

The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.

The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.

DVD Audio Support

If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.

When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDAudio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
supported.
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
these extensions for any other types of files.
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs • Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
begin playing the next available file.
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Disc Errors
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
player will automatically skip the file and begin playmessage is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
ing the next available file.
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
supported. For both formats, the recommended
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or first track.
previous file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote control’s PROG Up and Down buttons.

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot Display
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera- Other Language Setup
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.

DVD Player Language Menu

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting • Using the remote control Up and Down cursor butto accommodate languages other than Japanese or Engtons, select a digit for the current position. After
lish. These languages are selected using a special fourselecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
digit code.
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter • When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the language code
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙*⬙. If the
additional instructions:
digits are visible after this step, then the language code
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor butis valid.
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
vehicle was purchased.
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Language
Code
Language
Code
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
Dutch
2311
French
1517
German
1304
Italian
1819
Portuguese 2519
Spanish
1418

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Rating and Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to control
the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVDVideo discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them
where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and
higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.

The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.

When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.

DVD Password Entry

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the
follow these additional instructions:
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.

• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.

DVD Player Level Menu

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
Product Agreement
buttons, select the Rating tab.
This product incorporates copyright protection technol• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intelleccontrol’s ENTER button.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherthe value for the current digit, and then press the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next disassembly is prohibited.
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
Dolby威 Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
digits.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the ⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.

Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The button located in the center of the right hand control CD Player
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
source.
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left hand
after the current track begins to play.
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left hand control operation in
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
Radio Operation
CDs on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
does not function for all other radios.
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
The button located in the center of the left hand control To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have precautions:
programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchyour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become CLIMATE CONTROLS
too high.
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) instrument panel below the radio.
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

1 – Front Blower
2 – Temperature Control
3 – MODE Control

4 – DEFROST Mode
5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 – RECIRCULATION Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.

temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position. Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
Temperature Control
from several patterns of air distribuUse this control to regulate the temtion. You can select either a primary
perature of the air inside the passenger
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
compartment. Rotating the knob couna blend of two of these modes. The
terclockwise, from top center into the
closer the control is to a particular
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Panel Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
Bi-Level Mode
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
with
maximum
blower and warm temperature settings
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
for
best
windshield
and side window defrosting.
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
small amount through the defrost and side window A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
demist outlets.
these modes only when necessary.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

Recirculation Control
Press this button to choose between
outside air intake or recirculation of
the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to
cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot
or humid weather.

• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C
button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.

NOTE:
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
seat passengers.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Economy Mode
MAX A/C
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.

For maximum cooling, when MAX
A/C is selected the A/C is turned on
automatically and the air is recirculated.

Air Conditioning Operation
Push this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuNOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
minate when the A/C system is
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
engaged.
button is pushed.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

• When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using rotary
knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature
setting by using the temperature up and down buttons.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.

• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the temperature controls, the passenger side temperature becomes the same as the
temperature selected by the driver.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1 - Blower Control
2 - Left Temperature Up
3 - SYNC Indicator
4 - Left Temperature Indicator
5 - Right Temperature
Indicator
6 - DELAY Indicator
7 - Right Temperature Up
8 - MODE

9 - DEFROST
10 - Right Temperature Down
11 - A/C
12 - A/C Indicator
13 - SYNC Temperature Button
14 - Left Temperature Down
15 - RECIRCULATE

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
1. Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
2. Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posicomfort as quickly as possible.
tion on the ATC Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
Automatic Operation

units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
3. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
passenger temperature buttons. Once the desired tem(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
perature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
4. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to display until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and
function automatically.
DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display. The
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected, or by adjusting the blower control knob and
setting the fan to any fixed speed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
Auto mode.
features.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, by selecting one of the following positions.
the temperature doors will continue to operate automatiPanel Mode
cally.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
There are six fixed blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
air forced through the system in any and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off
mode you select. The blower speed the airflow from these outlets.
increases as you move the control
Bi-Level Mode
clockwise from the OFF position.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
Blower Control
outlets and defrost outlets.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
adjusting the blower control knob. The fan will now mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.

NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.

Mix Mode
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
conditioning system. When in A/C mode and the
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable ATC is set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows
through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press
while keeping the windshield clear.
the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC
Defrost Mode
display and deactivate the A/C system.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum NOTE:
blower and temperature settings for best windshield and • If the system is in Mix, Bi-Level or Defrost Mode, the
A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
side window defrosting.
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control
knob when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.

Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.

Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

Operating Tips

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 380

▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Four–Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.7L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(4.7L And 5.7L Engine) —
1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 377

▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — 2500 Models Only . . . . . . . . 401

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 411
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Transfer Case Position Indicator Light . . . . . . 415
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . . 415
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . . 422

䡵 Stabilizer/Sway Bar System — Power Wagon
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
䡵 Safe Off-Road Driving —
Power Wagon Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points) . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . 444

䡵 Axle Locker System (2500 Models Only) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
䡵 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

▫ Operating Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . 478

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only . . . . . . . 480

䡵 Winch Usage (Power Wagon Only) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 481

▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . 456

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 481

▫ Understanding The Features
Of Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped . . . 482

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped . . . . . . 483

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 505

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped . . . 491
䡵 Tire Safety Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 496
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 497
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 498
䡵 Tires — General Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 506
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 515

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

▫ Directional Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 516

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 532

▫ Dual Rear Wheels – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 516

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 517

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 522

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire
䡵 Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
Light Load Inflation Switch Description
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(2500 Models) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ 3.7L And 4.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . .

. . . . 536
. . . . 536
. . . . 537
. . . . 537
. . . . 538

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

▫ 1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 541

▫ 2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

䡵 Vehicle Loading

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
▫ Towing This Vehicle
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 549

▫ Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

STARTING PROCEDURES
Normal Starting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key fob to the START position and release
The starter should not be operated for more than 15when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
10 seconds, turn the key fob to the OFF position, wait five
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.

Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage when the engine is running.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is
running smoothly.

After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
1500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.

2500/3500 Models
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
by the right front tow hook.
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
CAUTION!
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on
Damage to the transmission may occur if the followthe c-clip.
ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
WARNING!
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUcord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.

Four–Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.7L Engine) — If Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The
shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the
steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
shift lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
PARK (column shift only).

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move
the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.

PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
range.
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
(ERS) shift control (described later in this section). Press- lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
ing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift) or moving the parking brake
shift lever to the left or right (-/+) (console shift) while in
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
the DRIVE position will select the highest available
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission gear, and will display that gear in the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
instrument cluster as 4, 3, 2, 1.
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever clockwise without first pulling it toward you (column shift), or rearward with
the brake pedal released (floor shift), after you
have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted
shift lever toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted
shifter, move the shift lever all the way forward and to
the left until it stops.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
the transmission cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-20°F [-29°C] or below), operation may briefly be
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal limited to second gear only. Normal operation will reoperating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of suitable level.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) feature (described below) to select a lower
gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
range will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
recur.
following steps:
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
1. Stop the vehicle.
service is required.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) switch
(column shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear
as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) (console shift) or the
ERS (-) or (+) switch (column shift) will change the top
available gear.

5
Column Shift Lever

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed

1
1

2
1-2

3
1-3

4
1-4

D
1-4

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
Console Shift Lever
left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) switch down (column
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to shift) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
the right (+) (console shift) or the ERS (+) switch (column will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
shift) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever slowed down.
position indicator in the instrument cluster.

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present:

HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, the transmission will downshift into third gear.

• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
• the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate temperature,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
TOW/HAUL Switch
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc- NOTE: TOW/HAUL mode locks out Overdrive.
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and
out of Overdrive.

Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(4.7L And 5.7L Engine) — 1500 Models Only
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The
shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the
steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
shift lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
PARK (column shift only).

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.

PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake range.
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
The transmission shift lever has only Park, Reverse, lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
Neutral, and Drive shift positions. Manual downshifts parking brake.
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)” in this When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
section). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift) placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
or moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+) (console transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
shift) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauavailable transmission gear, and will display that gear in tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade
the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is for when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and
fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
To access all six available gears, you must use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, described below.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excess heat generation.

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 397

Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an
additional underdrive gear which is not normally used
during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear
can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability
when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode,
gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the
service is required.
normal fourth and fifth gears.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
switch (column shift) or the shift lever to the left (-)
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
(console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current
second and first gear normally.
gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as
the top available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE
and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the shift
lever/switch one time in the (-) direction, the display will
show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

shift the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive gear). Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+) will
change the top available gear.

Console Shift Lever

Column Shift Lever

To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
the right (+) (console shift) or the ERS (+) switch (column
shift) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever
position indicator in the instrument cluster.

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing and accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed

1
1

2
1-2

3
4
5
6 D
1-3 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1-5
4 4, 5 4–6

Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if
the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,

• the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adNOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
equate temperature,
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) • vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift • the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
down.
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.

TOW/HAUL Switch

NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of
driving]. Because top gear is disabled, and the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — 2500 Models Only
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The
shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering
column. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transshifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
PARK.
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con- precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
engine.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
range.
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
(ERS)” in this section). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches on parking brake.
the shift lever while in the DRIVE position will select the
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauGear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever clockwise without first pulling it toward you after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.

(Continued)

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the shift lever toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as the transmission cools down.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condiNOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
(ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excess heat generation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue

to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.

switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+)
will change the top available gear.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)

Column Shift Lever

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the ERS (+) Overdrive Operation
switch until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transposition indicator in the instrument cluster.
mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if
WARNING!
the following conditions are present:
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed

1
1

2
1-2

3
1-3

4
1-4

5
1-5

6 D
1-6 1-6

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
ERS (-) switch down. The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
• the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate temperature,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

TOW/HAUL Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because sixth gear is disabled, and engine speed is
higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further information.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If Equipped
The transfer case provides four mode positions.
• Two-wheel drive high range (2H)
• Four-wheel drive high range (4H)
• Neutral (N)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4L)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as dry, hard surfaced roads.

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
moving the shift lever to the desired positions. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry,
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when
the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L
position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL
positions.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
can cause damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be For additional information on the appropriate use of each
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire transfer case mode position, see the information below:
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera2H
tures.
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.

4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N
Neutral - This range disengages the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

2H Or 4H ⇔ 4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case NEUTRAL.

NOTE:
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
2H ⇔ 4H
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera- • Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer
Case

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
• Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position)
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by mode positions:
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
located on the instrument panel.
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced
roads.

hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this
section for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK
and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left

If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ing properly and that service is required.
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.

WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require- front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer damage to driveline components.
case, located in this section.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

4WD LOCK
Shifting Procedure
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
NOTE:
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected posi4WD LOW
tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
requirements for the selected position have been met.
speed four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to
original position, make certain all shift requirements
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
N
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
ON.
information.

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,
reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete
the shift.

2WD Or 4WD LOCK⇔ 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

Alternate Procedure

NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
continuously while the original position indicator light
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
is ON, until all requirements have been met.
NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired • The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
position.
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
position, the shift will not take place and no position
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
indicator lights will be on or flashing.

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five
mode positions:
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
• Four-wheel drive automatic range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or fourwheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position)

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than
the 2WD mode.

left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,
4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located on the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the position indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
injury.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends power
to the rear wheels. The four–wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.

N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.

4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front Shifting Procedure
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
NOTE:
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
4WD LOW
position will remain ON, and the newly selected
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
position indicator light will continue to flash until all
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear drivethe requirements for the selected position have been
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
met. To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
original position, make certain all shift requirements
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
again.

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD ⇔ 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position
with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot
be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK ⇔ 4WD
LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
position, then the shift will not take place and no
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NEUTRAL.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (2500 MODELS ONLY) —
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired IF EQUIPPED
position.
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
NOTE:
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situaor if they no longer are being met while the shift tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with
attempt is in process, the desired position indicator the ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle
light will flash continuously while the original posi- with the differentials locked on pavement due to the
tion indicator light is ON, until all requirements have reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.
been met.
Alternate Procedure

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

CAUTION!
• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced
and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the
axles are locked on hard surfaced roads.
• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can damage
drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.

position, the rear axle is locked. In the FRONT/REAR
LOCK position, the front and rear axles are locked.
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
provides torque biasing capability for moderate low
traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.

To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch. “Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and OperatThe switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR ing” for further information. Move the axle locker switch
LOCK, and FRONT/REAR LOCK. Under normal driv- position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
ing conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLE (5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the
UNLOCK position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, the rear axle is locked.
front and rear axles are unlocked. In the REAR LOCK

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator
light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR
LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking
action.

WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road
driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road
driving will reduce the steering ability. This could
cause a collision and you may be seriously injured.

NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front
axle will lock.
To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light
will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to
side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right
hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance
may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the
axles.

To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to
AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to out when the rear axle is unlocked.
FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front
axle is locked.

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front
suspension travel in off-road situations.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm)
in the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major
advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect
it has on approach/departure and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway
bar switch located on the instrument panel.

5
1 — On Road
2 — Off Road

The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road.
The system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated
by a solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should
remain in the On-Road mode during normal driving
conditions.

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h), you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The system monitors
vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is
indicated by a flashing off road light and solid on
road light. Once vehicle speed is reduced below
14 mph (22 km/h), the system will attempt to return to
the Off-Road mode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI
or 4LO as shown in “Four Wheel Drive Operation” and
press the top of the stabilizer/sway bar button to obtain
the Off-Road position. The amber indicator light will
flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side
to side.
To return to the On-Road mode; press the bottom of the
stabilizer/sway bar button.

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss
of control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury. Contact your local service center for
assistance.

(ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should always tread
lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV
recreational areas. The National Forest Service, Bureau of
Land Management or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of information and usually have
maps with marked trails.

Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components
of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and
steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
with boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This addiONLY
tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics severe off-road situations that would be considered imYour vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities. passable by a normal truck.
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
venture out, you should contact your local governmental ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
agency to determine the designated off-road vehicle

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle
has an RTI of 655, which means you can articulate one
front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.

Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
Water Fording Characteristics
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to cross
steep incline.
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain
are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of You will encounter many types of terrain driving offwater, without stopping, 24 inches deep at a maximum road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water 30 inches before proceeding. There are many types of surface
deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h), both with conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. ControlCAUTION!
ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
The door sill height is 25 inches. Water may intrude
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.

WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.

When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4L (Low Range) for
additional traction or to improve handling and control on
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and
down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also,
use 4L (Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get
heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4H
(High Range) traction will not do the job.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low Range)
if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you
start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel
no more than a 1⁄4 turn quickly back and forth, while
still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a
fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.

enough to maintain your momentum without shifting.
If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a 1⁄4 turn quickly back and forth
for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are
any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.

• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through
with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots
in a trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
not stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brakappropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding may cause skidding and loss of control.
ing abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s
momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
around the tires and is very difficult to get through.
minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
You should use 4L (Low Range) with a gear low

CAUTION!

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically
improve your traction and handling, while driving on
the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal
air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back
up prior to reducing the pressure.

ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.

CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path

WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
guide you through.
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45Crossing Large Rocks
degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
CAUTION!
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large you just created at a 45-degree angle.
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
WARNING!
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

CAUTION!

and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.

CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.

Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
Getting High Centered
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high centered.

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a
hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is
too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill
side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on
top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches
or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then change transmission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4L
(Low) and proceed with caution. You should use first
gear and 4L (Low Range) for very steep hills.
• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle
and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not
race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of
grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end
begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring

all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the
crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach
the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
a 1⁄4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a
fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not
make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in
severe injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill • Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places
steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there
more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of
the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make
distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
vehicle descends too fast? If you feel confident in your
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L (Low
heading slightly up or down.
Range) with the transmission in first gear (manually
select first gear on automatic transmissions) and proWARNING!
ceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the
descent and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured.

• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall
or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,
allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine and transmission to

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to manner. You should only drive through areas which are
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
locking or skidding the tires.
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
WARNING!
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed very
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h]
hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUmaximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving;
TRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle
down.
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids
for signs of water ingestion.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only
be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to determine if
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,

effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross.
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or
muddy waters. These water types normally contain
hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.
If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than
proceed using the low and slow method.

CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
water can easily push your vehicle downstream
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water,
a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater
than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition

and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle
heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.

WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or
form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like
rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

need to experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to
replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remember you must return the tires to normal air pressure
before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure
you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road
air pressure.

attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover your
vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you
CAUTION!
alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there
high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process?
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damAnswering these questions will help you determine the
age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of
vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a
Vehicle Recovery
tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
where great care needs to be taken during the recovery,
recovery should always be given consideration before

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are
severely hung up on something you should jack the
vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to
allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing
further damage. This should be tried before attempting
any recovery method.

CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional underbody damage.

in mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during
this process to clean the debris from the tread and
improve the traction. You want to create a rocking
motion with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle
momentum, which hopefully gets you out. Remember
to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the
shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free,
stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous
rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to
your vehicle and the environment.

CAUTION!

• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your ve- Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
hicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster
used methods. This simply involves shifting your than an indicated 35 mph (56 km/h).
vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying
throttle after each shift. During this process, for addi- • Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow
straps are a quick and easy way to recover your
tional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly
vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary
back and forth no more than a 1⁄4 turn. If you are stuck

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

vehicle which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your
vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper
or any other vehicle component as an attachment
point. Using tow straps requires coordination between
the two drivers. Good communication and line of sight
are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow
strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles.
There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the
vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join
two tow straps together using a 1 1⁄2 inch hard wood
dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap
breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two
to three feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow
vehicle, using light throttle, should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free
the vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist
in the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly

spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling
vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of
the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free
and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles.
The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the
throttle without using the brakes, once signaled by the
other driver. This sequence is important to avoid
having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.

WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which
could cause severe injury. Never leave more than two
or three feet of slack in the strap. More slack than this
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage. Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from
a strapping or winching situation.

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Additional Information) – Winching is most commonly
used in the following situations: there is no support
vehicle available, a high controlled force is required to
recover the vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to
work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a
great deal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle
out of the situation in a slow controlled manner. This
control works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to use the winch look
for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough
to hold more than the vehicle’s weight and provide a
direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and
tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or
increase the winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point
is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable

to the strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that
vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot
find an anchor point within reach try using your spare
tire by burying it. Once you have determined an
anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring there are a
least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and place a
floor mat or something else over the strung out cable.
Placing something over the strung out cable helps
keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place
the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle
as you power the winch in. Be careful not to allow
slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try
to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch
up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable
afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and
always stand back while winching.

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over
or straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload
the winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle
while winching. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in serious or fatal injury.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
After Driving Off-Road
propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
your vehicle ready when you need it.
and cleaned as soon as possible.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might there is a difference between the traction characteristics
not have full braking power when you need it to of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit pervehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
and cleaned as necessary.
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in traction.
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
correct the situation.
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.

WARNING!

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.

CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

After Driving Off-Road
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
propeller shafts.
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
your vehicle ready when you need it.
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
and cleaned as soon as possible.
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.

WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.

Tensioning The Wire Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:

WINCH USAGE (POWER WAGON ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED

2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.

Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds
wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very
high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate
the winch without reading and understanding the complete winch owner’s manual.

1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on
the winch drum.

CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required to tension the wire rope.
3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

Winch Motor Thermal Protection
Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device
in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
winch.
power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor
to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out
for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.

CAUTION!

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

Understanding The Features Of Your Winch

Winch Components

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle 6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum
charging system and features a thermal protection switch to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the
that automatically stops motor function in the power-in wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
direction if the motor gets too hot.
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote interface between the winch operator and the winch. The
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the remote control provides the ability to power the winch in,
winch to function.
out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the toggle
switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
power the winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and
left in the neutral (center) position.
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch
CAUTION!
drum if the winch motor is stopped.
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between
hook.
speed and pulling power.
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
and minimizes damage to the rope.

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

Winch Accessories
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves: Wire rope, through
use, will develop ⬙barbs⬙
which can slice skin. It is extremely important to wear
protective gloves while operating the winch or handling
the wire rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes or anything that
could become entangled in
the wire rope and other moving parts.

Snatch/Block Pulley: Used
properly, the multi-purpose
snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch’s pulling
power; and (2) change your
pulling direction without
damaging the wire rope.
Proper use of the snatch block
is covered in ⬙Before You
Pull.⬙

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

Clevis/D-Shackles:
The Operating Your Winch
D-Shackle is a safe means of
WARNING!
connecting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
blocks. The shackle’s pin is
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
threaded to allow easy re• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
moval.
when spooling wire rope in or out.
• Never use as a hoist.
• Never use to move persons.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typi- • Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
cally made of tough, high- • Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the wire rope.
quality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point • Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or
for the winch rope to a wide
under load.
variety of anchor points and • Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is
objects, as well as protect livunder load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope
ing trees.
drum is moving.
(Continued)

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep
others away during winching.
• Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation
and when spooling.
• Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use
a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk
protector on the anchor.
• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.

• Never use ⴖbungeeⴖ straps that develop tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of force
when stretched.
• Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
• Never winch when there are less than five wraps
of wire rope around the winch drum.
• Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, then using remote
inside a vehicle.
• Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

General Information
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
CAUTION!
points to remember when using your winch are:
1. Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
2. Always take your time when using a winch.
3. Use the right equipment for the situation.
4. Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire
rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
5. Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
remote control.
6. Think safety at all times.

• Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch
and the winching operation.
• Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
• Always be sure any element which can interfere
with safe winching operations is removed prior to
initiating winching.
(Continued)

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always keep remote control lead clear of the
drum, wire rope and rigging.
• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
• Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.

1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear or damage.
2. Put on gloves.

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the 4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.
strap to the hook (if not attached).

Free Spool

Hook Strap

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire 6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a certain your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted choker-chain around the object.
and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to wire rope
damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap
while you work.

Tree Trunk Protector

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand the load.

7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure
anchor is critical to winching operations. An anchor must
be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as
low as possible. If no natural anchors are available when
recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the
anchor point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission
in NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels
to prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want
an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the
direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope
Clevis/D-Shackles
to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An
anchor point as far away as possible will provide the 8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
winch with its greatest pulling power.
clutch lever on the winch to engage.

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.

10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote control switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand well
clear of it and never step over it.

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the wire rope.

5
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

13. In certain situations you the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch
may decide to throw a heavy block. Your situation may have other ⴖno peopleⴖ zones.
blanket or similar object over
the wire rope. A heavy blanket can absorb energy should
the wire rope break. Place it
on the wire rope midway between the winch and the anchor point. Do this before the
wire rope is put under tension. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension
is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead.
If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the
tension on the wire rope first.
14. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖ zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely aware
of your intentions before you pull. Declare where the
spectators should not stand - never behind or in front of

No People Zones

15. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine
on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire rope
is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

For additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be NOTE:
slowly driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue • Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are
winch motor to cool down.
able to drive the vehicle, the winching operation is
complete.
• What to look for under load: The wire rope must
always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from drawing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the
wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock
loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire
rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to
stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the winch.
So, line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
Using The Remote Control
winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or
mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end
of the drum, which will free up space for continued
winching.
16. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle’s is
complete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and put
the transmission in PARK. Release tension in the wire
rope.
17. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the
anchor.
18. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through
the hand, control the winch at all times.

WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the
remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when
spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling
drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and
straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope
under light tension and spool the wire rope back and
onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this
process until the winch hook is the same distance as the
full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch
the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach
the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb
and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the
wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the
remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control
switch.

5
20. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean and
dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put
the cap on the solenoid plug-in.

NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
19. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow clean, dry area.
hook.

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

Rigging Techniques

How To Change The Pulling Direction

Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight
line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to
assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think
⬙safety⬙ at all times.

Change Pulling Directions

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

All winching operations should have a straight line from Double Line
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch
block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle
will enable you to change your pulling direction while
still allowing the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly
onto the spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical advantage and that increases your pulling
power.

Because pulling power decreases with the number of
layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a
snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This
decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,
and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough
wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle’s frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through NOTE:
a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor
there is a problem with the power steering system.
point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure
to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerchain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
WARNING!
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical Continued operation with reduced power steering
steering capability if power assist is lost.
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.

Parking Brake Release

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
The foot operated parking brake is located below the switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the cluster will illuminate.
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.

If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydroboost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.

NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
BRAKE SYSTEM
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
operating temperature.
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All of the
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions, and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.

WARNING!
• ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s), and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a
limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual. This brake
pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping
to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward
traction.
Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of BAS, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

WARNING! (Continued)
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied.
During operation, HSA will activate the brake control
system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on
the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight
pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is
normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:

Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in
launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the • Vehicle must be stopped
level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short • Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backshort duration, the system will release brake pressure
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will
activate.
The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears,
and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL.

Towing And Hauling With HSA
The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded
or towing a trailer unless the TOW/HAUL switch, located on the center stack, is selected. When activated, the
“TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information. In
order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under
towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver
comfort while launching on a hill, the system recognizes
when the TOW/HAUL switch is activated and compensates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while
throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from
rolling down the hill.

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply
more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the
brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK or using the parking brake, it will roll down
the incline and could collide with another vehicle,
object or person, and cause serious or fatal injury.
Always remember to use the parking brake while
parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible
for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off

Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
(Continued) procedure:
1. Start with the engine OFF, and the vehicle in PARK
with the wheels straight.
2. Start the engine.

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. With the engine running and the brake applied, rotate EVIC Equipped Vehicles
the steering wheel 180° counterclockwise from center.
HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC
equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature,
4. Press the “ESC Off” switch four times within 20 secrefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
onds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should appear and
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
disappear four times.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clockElectronic Stability Control (ESC) – If Equipped
wise from center).
The ESC system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
is off.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds maintain the desired path.
to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re-enable
HSA functionality.

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.

All Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD, 4WD AUTO, Or 4WD
LOCK Modes Can Choose The Following ESC
Operating Modes:

ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD/4WD
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than AUTO/4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles. Whenappropriate for the steering wheel position.
ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if
equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral, back to
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO, the ESC system will be in
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
this mode. This mode should be used for almost all
driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial
Off” or “ESP Off” for specific reasons as noted below.

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from loss of vehicle control
due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ⬙ESC Off

Indicator Light⬙ will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

WARNING!
In the “Partial Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
reduced.
All Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD AUTO And
4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose The
Following ESC Operating Mode. This Is The Only
ESC Operating Mode in 4WD LOW:
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to
trail conditions. This mode is entered by pressing and
holding the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds when the
vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. After five
seconds, the “ESP Off Indicator Light” will illuminate

and the “ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer.
Press and release the trip odometer button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed
into the PARK position from any other position and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
In this mode, ESC and TCS except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
40 mph (64 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h) the ESC system shuts off. ESC
is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere
with off-road driving but ESC function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” will always be illuminated

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
press the “ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
“ESC On” mode of operation.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
“ESC Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
LOW. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or
position. It should go out with the engine
the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
or NEUTRAL, to 4WD LOW, the ESC system will be in
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
this mode.
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
WARNING!
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authostability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer- rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not diagnosed and corrected.
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off”
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lomode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
only.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system
may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESP
Off Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

TSC is only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
can be disabled by pressing the “ESC Off” switch and
Tire Markings
entering “ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the
“ESC Partial Off” or “ESC Off” modes. Refer to the ESC
portion of this section for an explanation of the different
ESC operating modes.

WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa•
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
[295 kg]).
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. Refer to “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information” in “Starting and OpEconomy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear erating” for further information.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in the
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
them with other types of tires.
and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
CAUTION!
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
pattern.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
first opportunity.
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
WARNING!
stopping when you are stuck.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style

• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

WARNING!

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for It is recommended you contact your original equipment
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE
Type “S” specifications.
Use “Class U” chains on 2500/3500 model trucks, or
other traction aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 0.5 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2
vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
NOTE:
• On 4x2 and 4x4 1500 model trucks, the use of class “S”
snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of
trucks equipped with P265/70R17 tires.
• On 4x2 2500 model trucks, the use of class “U” snow
chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks
equipped with LT245/70R17 or LT265/70R17 tires.

• On 4x4 2500 model trucks, the use of class “U” snow
chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, or LT285/
70R17 tires.
• On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheel) model
trucks, the use of class “U” snow chains is permitted
on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with
LT265/70R17 tires.
• On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 DRW (Dual Rear Wheel) model
trucks, the use of class “U” snow chains is permitted
on the front and rear wheels of trucks equipped with
LT235/80R17 tires.

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of any
model except for 3500 DRW (Dual Rear Wheel)
trucks equipped with LT235/80R17 tires. There may
not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do
not use tire chains on the rear wheels of 1500 model
trucks equipped with LT275/70R17, P275/60R20, or
285/45R22 tires. There may not be adequate clearance
for the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. All season tires can be identified by the hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

Tire Rotation

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

Directional Tires – If Equipped
Dual Rear Wheels – If Equipped
For the R/T package with 22” tires & wheels, tire rotation
must be performed with consideration of the tire rotation
direction. The recommended rotation pattern for directional tires is shown below.

Tire Rotation

The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-Road
tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim, or installed at a different
location, to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the truck. For example, if the spare is used to
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.

NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
the tire.
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS
will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it
Base System
is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
readings to the receiver module.
instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
message will display in the EVIC, and a chime will
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
and to maintain the proper pressure.
four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop
as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each
The TPMS consists of the following components:
tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
• Receiver module,
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
• Four TPM sensors, and
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will
• TPM Telltale Light

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
TPMS to receive this information.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be displayed,
fault can occur due to any of the following:
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
(24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and “LOW
the TPM sensors.
TIRE PRESSURE” text message, as long as no tire pres2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains sure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
materials that may block radio wave signals.
four active road tires.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light

The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five
seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing.

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message is then followed by a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.

Vehicles With Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire Light
Load Inflation Switch Description (2500 Models) –
If Equipped

WARNING!
Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire
pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure
settings if carrying more than two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo. The vehicle
“Light Load Definition” is found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label which is located
on the rear face of the driver door opening. Failure to
do so may cause you to lose control resulting in a
collision, causing serious or fatal injury.

The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the
driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light load
inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold
depending on the vehicle’s load condition. The Tire and
Loading Information label defines the recommended
front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle
when operating in the Max Load condition. A Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is also available
defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when operating in the Light Load condition. When the tire light
load inflation switch LED is ON, the TPMS is using the
light load inflation pressure (cold) low inflation warning
thresholds.

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation – If
Equipped
• This vehicle may have different recommended tire
pressure values between the front and rear tires as
shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and
the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label. It is
also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appropriate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle
Max Load condition.

Tire Light Load Inflation Switch

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver
to change between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold depending on the vehicle’s load condition.
Refer to the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information”
label for the vehicle’s Light Load inflation pressures
and “Tire and Loading Information” label for the
vehicle’s Max Load inflation pressures.

Example Supplemental Tire Pressure Label

To switch from the max load inflation pressure (cold) low
pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation
pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold, begin by
placing the ignition switch in the RUN position. Next,
lower all four road tire pressures to the Light Load
Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental

STARTING AND OPERATING 529

Tire Pressure Information label. The Supplemental Tire
Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of
the driver door opening. Use an accurate tire gauge to
check the tire pressures when lowering all four tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this updated pressure
information. After all four tire pressures have been
lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures, press the
tire light load inflation switch. If the tire light load
inflation switch’s amber colored LED turns ON, the
TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure (cold) low
pressure warning thresholds.
If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED
flashes on and off for 10 seconds, after all four tire
pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation
pressures, the pressure in any one of the four tires may
not be at the light load inflation pressure (cold) values as
indicated for the Light Load condition as defined on the

Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on
the rear face of the driver door. Using an accurate tire
pressure gauge, re-check the tire pressures for the light
load inflation pressure (cold) value.

WARNING!
It is the driver’s responsibility to change to the max
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold condition when not driving in the light
load condition as defined as two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo. The vehicle
“Light Load Definition” is found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear
face of the driver door. Failure to do so may cause you
to lose control resulting in a collision, causing serious or fatal injury.

530 STARTING AND OPERATING

To switch back to the max load inflation pressure (cold)
low pressure warning threshold, press the tire light load
inflation switch. It is not necessary to first fill the tires to
the max load inflation pressure (cold) values to switch
the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold. If after pressing
the tire light load inflation switch, and tire pressures are
below the max load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure
warning thresholds, the TPMS low pressure warning
telltale light (located in the instrument cluster) will turn
ON and a chime will sound. The tire pressures are now
required to be inflated to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) values described on the Tire and Loading Information label. The Tire and Loading Information label is
located on the drivers side B-pillar. If the tire light load
inflation switch LED turns OFF, the TPMS has been reset
and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning thresholds.

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4

STARTING AND OPERATING 531

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.7L and 4.7L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
5.7L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for

optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine
and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 533

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
• change the engine oil and oil filter
allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers are not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.

STARTING AND OPERATING 535

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap

CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.

STARTING AND OPERATING 537

WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
E-85 Badge
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and avoided.
15% unleaded gasoline.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full

538 STARTING AND OPERATING

• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
refueling
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
a period of at least 5 minutes
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer restarting and/or significant deterioration in driveability quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
during warm up.
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during exNOTE:
• When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C), tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
you may experience hard starting and rough idle Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
following start up even if the above recommendations equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
are followed.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.

Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.

STARTING AND OPERATING 539

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).

CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.

Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
Maintenance
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
CAUTION!
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are may affect driveability.
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel
CAUTION!
door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counterclockwise.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

Fuel Filler Cap

STARTING AND OPERATING 541

WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.

542 STARTING AND OPERATING

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
components sometimes specified by purchasers for inThe GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. cle’s GVWR.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
Tire Size
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
Payload
capacity of this tire size.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
Rim Size
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
listed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 543

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerInflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
Curb Weight
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. WeighThe curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
added.
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Loading
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
the brakes operate.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

544 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.

Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
hicles used for trailer towing.
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

STARTING AND OPERATING 545

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles maximum width of the front of a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

546 STARTING AND OPERATING

Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.

WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle
dealer
for
additional
information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 547

5
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)

EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)

548 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
trailer with a coupling king pin.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of
Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

STARTING AND OPERATING 549

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Fifth Wheel/
Greater than 10,000 lbs
Gooseneck
(4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment.

550 STARTING AND OPERATING

Ram 1500 4x2
3.7L V-6 4–Speed
Automatic Transmission

4.7L V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission

5.7L HEMI威V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission

ST
Towing: 3,750 lbs
(1701 kg) - max
Payload: 1,860 lbs
(839 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,600 lbs
(3447 kg) - max
Payload: 1,700 lbs
(771 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,400 lbs
(4717 kg) - max
Payload: 1,660 lbs
(753 kg) - max

SLT/Outdoorsman/Sport
—
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,650 lbs
(3470 kg) - max
Payload: 1,730 lbs
(785 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,450 lbs
(4740 kg) - max
Payload: 1,670 lbs
(757 kg) - max

Laramie
—

—

Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,050 lbs
(4559 kg) - max
Payload: 1,610 lbs
(730 kg) - max

STARTING AND OPERATING 551

Ram 1500 4x4
4.7L V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission

5.7L HEMI威V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission

ST
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,400 lbs
(3356 kg) - max
Payload: 1,540 lbs
(698 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,250 lbs
(4649 kg) - max
Payload: 1,510 lbs
(685 kg) - max

SLT/Outdoorsman/Sport
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,450 lbs
(3379 kg) - max
Payload: 1,560 lbs
(708 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,250 lbs
(4649 kg) - max
Payload: 1,530 lbs
(694 kg) - max

Laramie

—

Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 9,850 lbs
(4468 kg) - max
Payload: 1,610 lbs
(730 kg) - max

552 STARTING AND OPERATING

Ram 2500 & 3500
2500 Power Wagon威

5.7L HEMI威 V-8 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission

6.7L Cummins威 Turbo
Diesel I-6 6-Speed
Manual Transmission
6.7L Cummins威 Turbo
Diesel I-6 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission

Towing: 10,100 lbs
(4581 kg) - max
Payload: 1,780 lbs
(807 kg) - max
—

—

2500 ST SLT Bighorn/
Lonestar Laramie Outdoorsman
Towing: 12,300 lbs
(5579 kg) - max
Payload: 3,120 lbs
(1415 kg) - max
Towing: 13,350 lbs
(6055 kg) - max
Payload: 2,490 lbs
(1129 kg) - max
Towing: 15,450 lbs
(7008 kg) - max
Payload: 2,580 lbs
(1170 kg) - max

3500 ST SLT Bighorn/
Lonestar Laramie Outdoorsman
—
Towing: 14,050 lbs
(6372 kg) - max
Payload: 5,050 lbs
(2291 kg) - max
Towing: 22,700 lbs
(10296 kg) - max
Payload: 5,130 lbs
(2327 kg) - max

STARTING AND OPERATING 553

NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• http://www.ramtrucks.com.
• http://www.ramtruck.ca (Canada).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
Consider the following items when computing the
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

554 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 555

WARNING! (Continued)

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

(Continued)

556 STARTING AND OPERATING

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
Do not attempt to tow a trailer with less than the full
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
size spare tire.
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
GVWR and GAWR limits.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation presThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
sures before trailer usage.
personal injury.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
required when towing a trailer with electronically
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
proper inspection procedure.
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.

Towing Requirements – Tires
•
•

•
•

STARTING AND OPERATING 557

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic
(EOH) trailer brakes.

558 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: This module has been designed and verified The user interface consists of the following:
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydrauGAIN/ Brake Output Power Display
lic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be
Shows the current GAIN setting.
compatible with ITBM.
This display may also be used to display diagnostic
information, if needed.
• SC — Short Circuit to Ground
• Sb — Short to Battery
• CF — Controller Fault – If this message appears on the
display, see your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle brakes are applied, the display will no
longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the
trailer brakes.
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

GAIN/Brake Output Power Display
Manual Brake Control Lever
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
GAIN Adjustment Buttons

Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to
activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control

STARTING AND OPERATING 559

lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control
the trailer brakes.
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The
GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condiIf no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
turned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button or and weather.
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
Adjusting GAIN
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
(30–40 km/h).
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.

560 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally, and properly adjusted.
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in the
EVIC (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM,
braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting
will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the EVIC options.
5. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or
4. Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the
until System Setup appears on the screen.
screen.

STARTING AND OPERATING 561

5
6. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or NOTE: 1500 Models Only – Light Electric and Heavy
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type Electric will only be available due to the tow capacities of
appears on the screen.
the vehicle.
7. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or
decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A
GAIN setting of 5 is a good starting point.

562 STARTING AND OPERATING

8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.

CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result
in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.

WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result
in personal injury.

EVIC Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer connection,
NOTE:
trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use
Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your
with air trailer brake systems and other systems not
Instrument Panel” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 563

compatible with ITBM. To determine the type of The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
brakes on your trailer and the availability of control- but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
lers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if
an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package will include a four and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.

Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground

4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

564 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Any work done to the vehicle’s electrical system or
wiring should be performed by a qualified automotive technician. If done improperly it may cause
damage to the electrical system wiring and could
result in serious or fatal injury.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes

5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps

Automatic Transmission
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
“TOW/HAUL” mode (if equipped) or select a lower gear
using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature.

STARTING AND OPERATING 565

NOTE: Using “TOW/HAUL” mode or a lower gear Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
you can get back to cruising speed.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than − Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Cooling System
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
before towing.
Tow/Haul
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature ON when driving in
hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature) on more severe
grades.

− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.

566 STARTING AND OPERATING

− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.

CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.

SNOWPLOW
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.

WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual
2500/3500 Models Only
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current Body

STARTING AND OPERATING 567

Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or Before Plowing
snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
unique electrical systems that must be connected to
level.
properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightvehicle systems.
ness.

WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual

CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior lamps are not properly installed.

• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 in (6 cm to
1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.

568 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
GAWR should never be exceeded.
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
options or passengers, etc.
parked.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.

Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.

Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas- Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
sengers.
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specificaoperator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
and allow adequate passing clearance.
of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset

STARTING AND OPERATING 569

Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.

General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.

When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and driveNOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
train damage, the following precautions should be obwith outside temperature display, the display may show
served.
higher temperatures than the outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked • Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient temperaexceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
ture sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
4H.
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed.

570 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L • Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
the transmission.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition

Wheels OFF The Two-Wheel Drive
Ground
Models

Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions

Flat Tow

Dolly Tow
On Trailer

NONE

Front
Rear
ALL

NOT ALLOWED

• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)

• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK

STARTING AND OPERATING 571

5. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towwill result.
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
CAUTION!
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
improper towing is not covered under the New
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
may leak from the transmission, causing damage
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in
to internal parts.
PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

572 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted
into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to the following
for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting
procedure for your vehicle.

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in the
PARK position for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to
be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
damage to internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.

STARTING AND OPERATING 573

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.

574 STARTING AND OPERATING

9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with transmission in DRIVE.
10. Turn OFF the engine.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
tow bar.
gear clash.
15. Release the parking brake.

STARTING AND OPERATING 575

7. Shift the transmission into PARK.
8. Release the brake pedal.
9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
10. Start the engine.
11. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Release the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift Transfer
Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.

576 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL button.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Shift automatic 8. Start the engine.
transmission into PARK.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but that there is no vehicle movement.
do not start the engine.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Turn OFF the engine.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
14. Shift the transmission into PARK.
(located by the selector switch). The NEUTRAL indicator

STARTING AND OPERATING 577

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
15. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
16. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
17. Release the parking brake.

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

NOTE:
• A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that
• The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL
shift requirements have not been met.
from the 4WD AUTO (if equipped) position.

578 STARTING AND OPERATING

8. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for selector switch.
normal usage:
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL,
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
nected to the tow vehicle.
clash.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

9. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but 10. Release the brake pedal.
do not start the engine.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Start the engine.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
14. Release the parking brake.
(located by the selector switch) until the NEUTRAL
indicator light turns off.
15. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
7. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.

STARTING AND OPERATING 579

NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
for a transfer case shift to take place and for the
prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button
position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
and must continue to be met until the shift has been
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
completed. If any of these requirements are not met
not take place and no position indicator lights will be
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, or are no
on or flashing.
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator
• A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
light will flash continuously until all requirements are
that shift requirements have not been met.
met or until the NEUTRAL button is released.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 䡵 Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

▫ Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
▫ Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 609
▫ Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped . . . 599 䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

▫ Column Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 610

582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

▫ Center Console Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . 611

▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob . . . . . 614

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
upper switch bank just below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.

584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585

WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
Removal
To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the
plastic access cover, located on the side of the seat. To
remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest
to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking
tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat
frame.

6
Jack Access Cover

586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.

Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587

WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
1. Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag (unrolled). Make sure
the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.

6
Turn Screw And Lug

588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical
package (in direction of arrows) and tie to the jack using
the tie straps.

Tying Bag To Jack With Straps

Folding Flap And Rolling Bag

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589

6
Jack And Tools Tied

4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor, and then secure to the floor pan
using the wing bolt. Reinstall the plastic cover.

Jack And Tools (1500 Series)

590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube.
Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under
the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)

NOTE: Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem
facing the ground.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.

WARNING!
Removing The Spare Tire
1 — Wheel Wrench
2 — Spare Tire

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.

It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
avoid tangling the loose cable.
3. Set the parking brake.

592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive Instructions
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the jack:

594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• 1500 Series Trucks
When changing a front wheel, place the scissors jack
under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown
below.

4X4 Jacking Location

Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not
required.
4X2 Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595

For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel, Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
CAUTION!
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
drive tubes extending to the rear.
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
and adjust the jack position as required.

Rear Jacking Location

596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• 2500/3500 Series Trucks
For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a front
wheel, place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind
the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as possible on
the straight part of the frame.

4x2 Jacking Location

Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension, may be used, but is not
required.
For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the front
wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and
connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the
jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the
drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the jack tube
extension and wheel wrench.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597

6
4x4 Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location (All)

For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel, Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.

598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On
single rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts nuts toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models
(DRW) the wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a
and adjust the jack position as required.
flat face. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts. To avoid the risk
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the wheel
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the nuts using a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nut
tightness is 130 ft lbs (177 N·m) torque (1500 Series), 135 ft
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
lbs (183 N·m) torque for 2500/3500 single-rear wheel
(SRW) models, and 145 ft lbs (197 N·m) for 3500 dual
WARNING!
rear-wheel models. If in doubt about the correct tightRaising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your
the vehicle unstable and cause a collision. It could authorized dealer or at a service station.
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

CAUTION!

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.

Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
For 2500/3500 single rear-wheel (SRW) models, use the
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off.
Insert the blade end into the pry-off notch and carefully
pop off the hub cap with a back-and-forth motion.

7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage. first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on 3500
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
tools as previously described.
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
• Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub
cap. Do not use a twisting motion when removing
the hub cap, damage to the hub cap finish may
occur.
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pry-off notches. Make sure that the hook of the
jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap
notch before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back-and-forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug

nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles/
kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to
become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly
seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel
nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the
bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torques are shown in the following chart.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601

Disc Wheels

TypeNut
Cone
Flanged

StudSize
M14 x 1.5
M14 x 1.5

Hex Size
22 mm
22 mm

TorqueFt Lbs
120-150
130-160

TorqueNewtonMeters
160-200
190-220

8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels
Dual wheels are flat-mounted and center-piloted. The lug
nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two
drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the
washer.

Oiling Location

602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assembling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening, to ensure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear
Tightening Pattern
wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two
individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant 1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front snug fit.
location. The correct direction of rotation for dual tire
installations must also be observed.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603

2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles
(160 km) and after 500 miles (800 km).

WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
specifications at each lubrication interval.
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
position it properly across the wheel opening.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under the vehicle because the wheel
retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure
the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire
repaired or replaced immediately.

For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or
four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.

604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HOISTING
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca- precautions.
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
CAUTION!
used on any other parts of the underbody.

CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605

Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

Positive Battery Post

606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607

WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster spected at your authorized dealer.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
CAUTION!
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator. In general, the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain
the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing
the engine is most effective.

CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.

Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!

610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the
following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever:
Column Shifter — If Equipped
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

Shift Lever Override Access Port

5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the 6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
override tab through the access port (ringed circle) on the
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
bottom of the steering column.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611

Center Console Shifter — If Equipped
To access the override, carefully remove (using a flatbladed screwdriver) the override access cover which is
located on the right of the shift lever gate.
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the
override tab through the access port on the center console.

6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover

5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the
transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Towing
Condition

Wheels OFF
the Ground

Flat Tow

NONE

Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed

Front
Rear
ALL

2WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD

4WD Models
See instructions in “Recreational Towing”
under “Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.

If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.

614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- 15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU- flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels on the ground.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is
in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
• Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer
case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

. . . . . . . 623

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 623

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

▫ Front Driveshaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models
(Ram Trucks Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

▫ Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And
Turn Signal — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 658

▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) With Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . 671
▫ Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear
Wheels) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619

▫ Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
䡵 Fluid Capacities

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 676
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L

1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick (If Equipped)
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
9 — Engine Oil Fill
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L

7
1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
9 — Engine Oil Fill
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L

1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
soon as possible.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press

624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.

626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil

The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.

Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the Change Engine Oil
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
Identification Symbol
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
This symbol means that the oil has your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
been certified by the American location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Petroleum Institute (API). The Your Vehicle” for further information.
manufacturer only recommends
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
API Certified engine oils.
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
ber should not be used.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
NOTE: For 2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine operenvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ating under a gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
(6 350 kg) or greater, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended for all operating temperatures.
your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
quality requirements are met and the recommended
at every engine oil change.
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
Engine Oil Filter Selection
followed.
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
Materials Added To Engine Oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adof replacement filters varies considerably. Only highdition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high-quality oil
performance may be impaired by supplemental
filter and are recommended.
additives.

630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
maintenance intervals.
recommended.

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633

tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit. After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
Front Driveshaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
When performing other underhood services, the hood
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models (Ram Trucks Only)
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
cleaned and lubricated.
change. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR威 Type MS- The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Body Lubrication
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
lock cylinder.
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.

634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
blade performance.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
containers.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.

Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
(Continued) coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.

640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.

Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641

WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Checking Coolant Level – 3.7L, 4.7L, And 5.7L
Engines
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on
the dipstick.

642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.

3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir
neck.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
freezing.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
Points To Remember
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporand distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
enter the radiator.

644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) Brake Fluid Level Check
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
emissions.
when performing under the hood service or immediately
if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
Brake System
failure.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
maintenance intervals.
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645

With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)

646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.

(Continued)

Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. This inspection should be made with the vehicle in
a level position.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647

For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with
the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge
of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear
axle.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on
the 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on
10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.

NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.

Limited-Slip Differentials
1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR威 Limited
Slip Additive or equivalent be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Drain And Refill
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. The
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
MOPAR威 Limited Slip Additive or equivalent should be
maintenance intervals.
added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is
made.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).

648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Transfer Case

Automatic Transmission

Drain And Refill
Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
maintenance intervals.
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transLubricant Selection
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainFluid Level Check
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler fluid.
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
CAUTION!
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
• Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.

Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
normal operating temperature. Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.

650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tempedal.
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posiroom temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
tion ending with the lever in PARK.
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until 180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
CAUTION!
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat- Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After produce an accurate reading.
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into 7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651

dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
dipstick tube.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and undermaintenance intervals.
body protection.
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the resistance built into your vehicle.
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
What Causes Corrosion?
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
information.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads • Stone and gravel impact.
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on

652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.

CAUTION!

Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.

• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Special Care

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
a month.
scratch the paint.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
open.
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Interior Care
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manUse MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
ner:
upholstery and carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
with a clean, dry towel.
upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss
rag.
over time.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657

To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically
rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your
truck at least twice per year using the MOPAR威
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local
authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
loose dirt and debris.

4. Once dry, apply a small amount of MOPAR威
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or
sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck
bedliner.

WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become
slippery and may result in personal injury.

Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,
cloth or brush.
hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill
occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.

658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the
floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point is exposed under
the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While
not covered by your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix
to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required. To
repair a tear or gouge, follow the directions provided in
the MOPAR威 Quick Repair Kit.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each
fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Totally Integrated Power Module

Cavity
J01
J02

Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink

Mini
Fuse

Description
Trailer Tow
Electric Brake

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659

Cavity
J03

J04
J05
J06

Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green

J07

30 Amp
Pink

J08

40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink

J10

Mini
Fuse

Description

Cavity

Diesel Powertrain
Control Module – If
Equipped
Driver Door Node

J11
J12
J13

Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
Power Seat
Sway Bar Module –
If Equipped

J14
J15
J17
J18

Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Blue
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue

Mini
Fuse

Description
Transfer Case
Module
Rear Defroster
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD) Fuse
Trailer Tow
Lamps/Park Lamps
Front Blower
Starter Motor
Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module Transmission Range

660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
J19

J20
J21
J22
M1
M5
M6

Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow

Mini
Fuse

30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow

Description

Cavity

Rad Fan Motor HI/
Rad Fan Motor
Low
Front Wiper
Ground/Low/High
Washer Control

Sunroof Module

M10

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue

Stop Switch Lamp
115V AC Inverter
Power Outlet
(Instrument Panel
or Front Console)/
Rain Snsr

M11
M12

10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Green

Description
Power Outlet (Rear
Console or Center
Seat)
Front Heated Seat
& Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
Hands Free
Module/Vanity
Lamp/Universal
Garage Door
Opener Module
Climate Control
System
Radio/Amplifier

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661

Cavity
M13

M14
M15

M16

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow

20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow

10 Amp
Red

Description

Cavity

Main #2 Instrument
Cluster/Wireless
Control Module/
ITM/Siren/
Multifunction
Switch (Steering
Column Module)
Back Up Camera
(Domestic Only)
Power Seat
Module(s)/Audio
Telematics/Daytime
Running Lights
Relay/Instrument
Cluster/Transfer
Case Module
Airbag Module

M18
M19
M20

M21
M22
M23
M25

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue

20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Center Stop Lamp
Automatic Shutdown 1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Interior Lighting
/Sw Steering
Wheel/Sw Bank
Automatic
Shutdown 3
Horns (Low/High)
– Right
Horns (Low/High)
– Left
Fuel Pump Motor/
Diesel Lift Pump –
If Equipped

662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

Description
Driver’s Door
Switch
Ignition Switch
Powertrain Control
Module
Tire Pressure
Monitor
J1962 Diag
Connector
Back-Up Lamps

Cavity
M34

M35
M36

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red

15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow

M37

10 Amp
Red

M38

25 Amp
Natural

Airbag Module
Powertrain Control
Module

Description
Park Assist
Module/Climate
Control System
Module/IR Sensor/
Compass Module
Left Front & Rear
Parklamps
Power Outlet (Instrument Panel or
Center Console)
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
System Module/
Stoplamp Switch
All Door Lock
&Unlock

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663

CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse located in
the Integrated Power Module, located in the engine
compartment. The IOD cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without
removing it from the fuse block.
• As an alternative to the above steps you may disconnect the negative cables from both batteries.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.

664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully
seated; the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a
full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the
RUN position. This is a normal condition.

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.

LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
Dual Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Quad Headlamp – Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Quad Headlamp – High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Dual Headlamp) . . . . . 3157K
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Quad Headlamp) . . . 3157NA
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . 921
Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb No. Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) . . . . . . . . 194
Overhead Console Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS 212-2 Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7679 Rear License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
• When the vehicle is shipped from the factory, the IOD
fuse is in the up or extracted position. If the radio,
interior lamps, keyless entry or other features do not
work with the key OFF, check the position of the fuse
(or check to see if the fuse is blown) to ensure that it is
fully seated. When the IOD fuse is extracted, the
instrument cluster in the odometer window will display ⬙NO FUSE.”

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665

BULB REPLACEMENT
Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And Turn
Signal — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the four plastic push-in fasteners that secure
the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both
fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.

7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
screws.
access hole.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.

666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house 10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to bulb socket.
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
lamp unit housing.

CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp
bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen- bulb has been replaced.
gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667

Fog Lamps

Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps

1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access 1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
the back of the front fog lamp housing.
sheetmetal.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1⁄4 turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.

CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far 3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard bulb socket.
side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
retainers in the outer box side panel.
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp

2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body.

1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.

7
3. Turn the desired bulb socket ⁄ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
14

670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.

CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671

Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.

2. Rotate the socket 1⁄4 turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.

672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.

2. Turn the socket 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise to access the
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If bulb.
Equipped
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access 4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
to the bulb sockets.
housing.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673

Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped

1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise and remove
from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.

674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models
(Optional)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models
2500/3500 Longbed Models
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified). For 2500/
3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight
rating greater than 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

U.S.

Metric

26 Gallons

98 Liters

32 Gallons

121 Liters

34 Gallons
35 Gallons

129 Liters
132 Liters

5
6
7
7

Quarts
Quarts
Quarts
Quarts

4.7
5.7
6.6
6.6

Liters
Liters
Liters
Liters

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675

Cooling System
3.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7L Engine — 1500 Models (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7L Engine — 2500/3500 Models (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
5.7L Engine — 2500/3500 Models w/Heavy Duty
(MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)

U.S.

Metric

14 Quarts

13 Liters

14 Quarts

13 Liters

16 Quarts

15 Liters

18.7 Quarts

17.7 Liters

19.2 Quarts

18.2 Liters

676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine For 2500/ Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
3500 trucks operating under a gross Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
combined weight rating greater
correct SAE grade.
than 14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.)
Engine Oil Filter
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.7L Engine
ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677

Component
Spark Plugs – 4.7L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.7L and 4.7L
Engines
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [.99 mm]) Lower Bank — FR8T1332
(Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended

678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission - Gasoline
Engines Only
Transfer Case

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Transfer Case – BW44–44 Only
MOPAR威 BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive GL-5 SAE 75W-90 (MS-9763) or equivalent.
Models
Rear Axle – 1500 Models
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip
Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR威 Limited Slip
Additive or equivalent.
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500
Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90 or equivalent. Limited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch
Models
Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required.
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 682

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

680 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Depending on operating conditions, the message may
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
scheduled maintenance.
the next 500 miles (805 km).

C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S On

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 681 M

NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop For Fuel
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichwhile the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
ever comes first.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

682 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.

Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
Required Maintenance Intervals

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs. One set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
located on the side of the engine.

master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
S
C
H • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
E
operation.
D
U At Each Oil Change
L
E • Change the engine oil filter.
S

CAUTION!

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug and must be changed every 48,000 miles
(78 000 km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug and must be changed every 96,000 miles
(156 000 km).

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 683 M

8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 684 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 685 M

40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).**
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 686 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

56,000 miles (91 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 687 M

64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏

Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 688 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
N
T 54 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 689 M

88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 690 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L Engine).
N ❏ Replace the top row and side row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).**
C ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
E ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏

Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 691 M

104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 692 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
A
N ❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
C ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
E ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 693 M

128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 694 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
A
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
C
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

❏
❏
❏
❏
❏

Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
❏ Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 695 M

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 699

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

䡵 If You Need Assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 700

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 700
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703

698 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 699

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE

700 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (866) 726–4636
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 701

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

702 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 703

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

704 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 705

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

706 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

708 INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 639
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 630
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632,633
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,360,632
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503,511
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,65
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64,69,87,265
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,62,64,65
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 60,62,65
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 19
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639,674
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 360

INDEX 709

Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644,678
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,644
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 85
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,664
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25 Cab Top Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,87 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648,649
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648,678
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,401
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646,678
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

710 INDEX

Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,535
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,355
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,624
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,72
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,80
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,299
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 313
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277

INDEX 711

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,358,364
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Driving
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 276
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 640
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638,641
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 639,674,676
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

712 INDEX

Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516,601
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . 387,397,408
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 174
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 187
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . 415,422
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 624
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620,621,622
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . 620,621,622
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,535
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627,674,676
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628,674
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

INDEX 713

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 66
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,535
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,635
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629,676
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,168,250
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536,537
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 676
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,265,667
Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

714 INDEX

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531,676
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531,674
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541,623
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,391,402
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,134,530
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

INDEX 715

Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 168
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Hazard
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 191
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 168 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,220 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,248,250

716 INDEX

Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

16
18
17
16
21
12

Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 76
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,162
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64,69,87,265
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664,665
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

INDEX 717

Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . 264
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664,665
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 490
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 262,517
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,265,667
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,168,665,667
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Warning
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,259
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . 246,250
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,647
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,250
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,190 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

718 INDEX

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . . . 624 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Manual Transmission
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625,702
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) . . . . . . . . . . 187
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

INDEX 719

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,62,66
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60,62,65
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,255
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,255
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . 433,454
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . 433,454
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,275
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,275
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627,676
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629,676
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628,674
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628,674
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623,624
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,399,409
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,399,409
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,583
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,703
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

720 INDEX

Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 498
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . 203,208
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476,477
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 638,640
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Ramp Travel Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

INDEX 721

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . 573,575
Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574,578
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 353
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 257,275
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,78

Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,41,87
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 50
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71,74
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

722 INDEX

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,149
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 639,676
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,299
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 380,390,401
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573,575
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574,578
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,168,250

INDEX 723

Sliding Rear Window
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506,507
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,375
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476,477
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,663
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 511
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 360
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 250,584
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,80
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

724 INDEX

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 498,511
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,502,705
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516,601
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498,499
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 517
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492,502
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,400,410
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544,612
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

INDEX 725

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,422
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,390,401,648
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 191
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,255
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,250,665,667
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 313
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

726 INDEX

Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499,541
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,663
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,202
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Warning Lights
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . 246,250
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,634 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,170,634
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,634
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.

Chrysler Group LLC
12D241-126-AD

4th Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2011:12:20 12:30:27-05:00
Create Date                     : 2011:12:20 11:58:15Z
Metadata Date                   : 2011:12:20 12:30:27-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2012 Ram Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner's Manual
Description                     : 3rd Edition
Creator                         : 12D241-126-AD
Subject                         : 885200
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.3.1 (Windows)
Keywords                        : 885200
Document ID                     : uuid:f4b51a16-bc28-4511-a114-b5404b05606b
Instance ID                     : uuid:e0381581-e316-4a22-ad2d-fc1362fec188
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 730
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : 12D241-126-AD

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Dodge 2012 Ram Owners Manual Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner's

Dodge-2012-Dodge-1500-Owners-Manual-814523 dodge-2012-dodge-1500-owners-manual-814523

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation